SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT...

203
SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 2016 - 2019 Date: September 2015

Transcript of SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT...

Page 1: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

SPECIFICATION

FOR

INSTALLATION

OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES

2016 - 2019

Date: September 2015

Page 2: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/1 specification/preambles

F10 BRICK/ BLOCK WALLING To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TYPES OF WALLING 110 CLAY FACING BRICKWORK BRICKING UP DOORS/WINDOW - Bricks: To BS EN 771-1. - Manufacturer: Various. - Mortar: As section Z21. - Standard: To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand. - Bond: To match existing. - Joints: To match existing. 355 CONCRETE COMMON BLOCKWORK BRICKING UP DOORS/WINDOW - Blocks: To BS EN 771-3. - Manufacturer: Hanson Building Products. Product reference: Thermalite Shield. - Configuration: Solid. - Compressive strength: 4.0 N/mm2. - Work sizes: 440 x 215 x 100. - Mortar: As section Z21. - Standard: To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: 1:2:9 cement:lime:sand. - Bond: Half lap stretcher. - Joints: Flush. WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY 430 CONDITIONING OF CLAY AND CALCIUM SILICATE BRICKS - Bricks delivered warm from manufacturing process: Do not use until cold. - Absorbent bricks in warm weather: Wet to reduce suction. Do not soak. 440 CONDITIONING OF CONCRETE BRICKS/ BLOCKS - Autoclaved concrete bricks/ blocks delivered warm from manufacturing process:

Do not use. - Age of nonautoclaved concrete bricks/ blocks: Do not use until at least four weeks

old. - Avoidance of suction in concrete bricks/ blocks: Do not wet. - Use of water retaining mortar admixture: Submit details. 500 LAYING GENERALLY - Mortar joints: Fill vertical joints. Lay bricks, solid and cellular blocks on a full

bed. - Bond where not specified: Half lap stretcher. - Vertical joints in facework: Even widths. Plumb at every fifth cross joint.

Page 3: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/2 specification/preambles

545 LEVELLING OF SEPARATE LEAVES USING CEMENT GAUGED OR HYDRAULIC LIME MORTAR

- Locations for equal levelling of cavity wall leaves: As follows: - Every course containing vertical twist type ties or other rigid ties. - Every third tie course for double triangle/ butterfly ties. - Courses in which lintels are to be bedded. 561 COURSING BRICKWORK WITH EXISTING - Gauge: Line up with existing brick courses. 580 LAYING FROGGED BRICKS - Single frogged bricks: Frog uppermost. - Double frogged bricks: Larger frog uppermost. - Frog cavity: Fill with mortar. 610 SUPPORT OF EXISTING WORK - Joint above inserted lintel or masonry: Fully consolidated with semidry mortar to

support existing structure. 635 JOINTING - Profile: Consistent in appearance. 645 ACCESSIBLE JOINTS NOT EXPOSED TO VIEW - Jointing: Struck flush as work proceeds. 665 POINTING GENERALLY - Joint preparation: Remove debris. Dampen surface. - Mortar: As section Z21. - Standard: BS EN 998-2. - Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand. - Profile: To match existing. 671 FIRE STOPPING - Avoidance of fire and smoke penetration: Fit tightly between cavity barriers and

masonry. Leave no gaps. 690 ADVERSE WEATHER - General: Do not use frozen materials or lay on frozen surfaces. - Air temperature requirements: Do not lay bricks/ blocks: - In cement gauged mortars when at or below 3°C and falling or unless it is at

least 1°C and rising. - In hydraulic lime:sand mortars when at or below 5°C and falling or below 3°C

and rising. - In thin joint mortar glue when outside the limits set by the mortar

manufacturer. - Temperature of walling during curing: Above freezing until hardened. - Newly erected walling: Protect at all times from: - Rain and snow. - Drying out too rapidly in hot conditions and in drying winds.

Page 4: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/3 specification/preambles

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FACEWORK 710 THE TERM FACEWORK - Definition: Applicable in this specification to all brick/ block walling finished fair. - Painted facework: The only requirement to be waived is that relating to colour. 750 COLOUR CONSISTENCY OF MASONRY UNITS - Colour range: Submit proposals of methods taken to ensure that units are of

consistent and even appearance within deliveries. - Conformity: Check each delivery for consistency of appearance with previous

deliveries and with approved reference panels; do not use if variation is excessive. - Finished work: Free from patches, horizontal stripes and racking back marks. 760 APPEARANCE - Brick/ block selection: Do not use units with damaged faces or arrises. - Cut masonry units: Where cut faces or edges are exposed cut with table masonry

saw. - Quality control: Lay masonry units to match relevant reference panels. - Setting out: To produce satisfactory junctions and joints with built-in elements

and components. - Coursing: Evenly spaced using gauge rods. - Lifts: Complete in one operation. - Methods of protecting facework: Submit proposals. 780 GROUND LEVEL - Commencement of facework: Not less than 150 mm below finished level of

adjoining ground or external works level. 790 PUTLOG SCAFFOLDING - Use: Not permitted in facework. 800 TOOTHED BOND - New and existing facework in same plane: Bond together at every course to

achieve continuity. 830 CLEANLINESS - Facework: Keep clean. - Mortar on facework: Allow to dry before removing with stiff bristled brush. - Removal of marks and stains: Rubbing not permitted.

Page 5: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/4 specification/preambles

F30 ACCESSORIES/ SUNDRY ITEMS FOR BRICK/ BLOCK/ STONE WALLING To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. REINFORCING/ FIXING ACCESSORIES 210 CAVITY WALL TIES BRICKING UP DOORS/WINDOW - Standard: To BS 1243. - Type: Butterfly. - Material/ finish: Steel galvanised after manufacture. - Sizes: 150mm. 225 FIXING TIES IN MASONRY CAVITY WALLS - Embedment in mortar beds (minimum): 50 mm. - Placement: Sloping slightly downwards towards outer leaf, without bending. Drip

centred in the cavity and pointing downwards. - Spacing: Staggered in alternate courses. - Horizontal centres: 900mm - Vertical centres: 450mm. - Additional ties: Provide within 225 mm of reveals of unbonded openings. - Spacing: At no more than 300mm centres vertically. 241 WALL STARTERS/ CONNECTORS - Manufacturer: Expamet. - Product reference: Wall starter. - Material/finish: Galvanised, plasticol coated. - Sizes: To suit. FLEXIBLE DAMP PROOF COURSES/ CAVITY TRAYS 330 DAMP PROOF COURSE - Manufacturer: Ruberoid Building Products. - Product reference: Hyload. INSTALLATION OF DPCS/ CAVITY TRAYS 415 HORIZONTAL DPCS - Placement: In continuous lengths on full even bed of fresh mortar, with 100 mm

laps at joints and full laps at angles. - Width: At least full width of leaf unless otherwise specified. Edges of dpc not

covered with mortar or projecting into cavity. - Overlying construction: Immediately cover with full even bed of mortar to receive

next masonry course. - Overall finished joint thickness: As close to normal as practicable. 425 GROUND LEVEL DPCS - Joint with damp proof membrane: Continuous and effectively sealed.

Page 6: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/5 specification/preambles

435 STEPPED DPCS IN EXTERNAL WALLS - External walls on sloping ground: Install dpcs not less than 150 mm above

adjoining finished ground level. 475 SITE FORMED CAVITY TRAYS - Requirements to prevent downward ingress of water: - Profiles: To match those shown on drawings. Firmly secured. - Joint treatment: Use unjointed wherever possible, otherwise lap at least 100

mm and seal to produce a free draining and watertight installation. - Horizontal cavity trays: Support using cavity closer. - Sloping cavity trays: Prevent sagging. - Cleanliness: Free from debris and mortar droppings. 485 CAVITY TRAYS OVER OPENINGS AND OTHER CAVITY BRIDGINGS - Length: To extend not less than 150 mm beyond ends of lintels/ bridgings. 535 DPC/ CAVITY TRAY LEADING EDGE IN FACEWORK - PROJECTING - Treatment at face of masonry: Projecting 5 mm from face of wall at the following

locations: At ground level after bricking up door.

Page 7: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/6 specification/preambles

G20 CARPENTRY/ TIMBER FRAMING/ FIRST FIXING To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. PRODUCTS 210 STRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD (GRADED DIRECT TO STRENGTH CLASS) - Grading standard: To BS 4978, BS EN 14081-1, or other national equivalent and so

marked. - Strength class to BS EN 338: SC3 or SC4. - Treatment: C8. 270 UNGRADED SOFTWOOD FOR EXTERNAL/INTERNAL NON STRUCTURAL USE - Quality of timber: Free from decay, insect attack (except pinhole borers) and with

no knots wider than half the width of the section. - Surface finish: Sawn generally, regularized for wall battens. - Treatment: C8. WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY 401 CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF STRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD AND HARDWOOD - Dimensions: Dimensions in this specification and shown on drawings are target

sizes as defined in BS EN 336. - Tolerances: The tolerance indicators (T1) and (T2) specify the maximum

permitted deviations from target sizes as stated in BS EN 336, clause 4.3: - Tolerance class 1 (T1) for sawn surfaces. - Tolerance class 2 (T2) for further processed surfaces. 402 CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF NONSTRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD - Dimensions: Dimensions in this specification and shown on drawings are finished

sizes. - Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes: As stated in BS EN 1313-1: - Clause 6 for sawn sections. - Clause NA.2 for further processed sections. 420 WARPING OF TIMBER - Bow, spring, twist and cup: Not greater than the limits set down in BS 4978 or BS

EN 14081-1 for softwood, or BS 5756 for hardwood. 430 SELECTION AND USE OF TIMBER - Timber members damaged, crushed or split beyond the limits permitted by their

grading: Do not use. - Notches and holes: Position in relation to knots or other defects such that the

strength of members will not be reduced. - Scarf joints, finger joints and splice plates: Do not use without approval.

Page 8: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/7 specification/preambles

440 PROCESSING TREATED TIMBER - Cutting and machining: Carry out as much as possible before treatment. - Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways, thickness, planed,

ploughed, etc. - Surfaces exposed by minor cutting/ drilling: Treat with two flood coats of a

solution recommended by main treatment solution manufacturer. 450 MOISTURE CONTENT - Moisture content of wood and wood based products at time of installation: Not

more than: - Covered in generally unheated spaces: 24%. - Covered in generally heated spaces: 20%. - Internal in continuously heated spaces: 20%. 510 PROTECTION - Generally: Keep timber dry and do not overstress, distort or disfigure sections or

components during transit, storage, lifting, erection or fixing. - Timber and components: Store under cover, clear of the ground and with good

ventilation. Support on regularly spaced, level bearers on a dry, firm base. Open pile to ensure free movement of air through the stack.

- Trussed rafters: Keep vertical during handling and storage. ERECTION AND INSTALLATION 780 WALL PLATES - Position and alignment: To give the correct span and level for trusses, joists, etc. - Bedding: Fully in fresh mortar. - Joints: At corners and elsewhere where joints are unavoidable use nailed half lap

joints. Do not use short lengths of timber. 784 JOISTS GENERALLY - Centres: Equal, and not exceeding designed spacing. - Bowed joists: Installed with positive camber. - End joists: Positioned approximately 50 mm from masonry walls. 786 JOISTS ON HANGERS - Hangers: Bedded directly on and hard against supporting construction. Do not use

packs or bed on mortar. - Joists: Cut to leave not more than 6 mm gap between ends of joists and back of

hanger. Rebated to lie flush with underside of hangers. - Fixing to hangers: A nail in every hole. 791 PROPRIETARY JOIST HANGERS - Manufacturer: Expamet. - Product reference: Standard leg speedy. - Material/ finish: Pre-galvanised mild steel. - Size: To suit joist, design load and crushing strength of supporting construction.

Page 9: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/8 specification/preambles

795 TRIMMING OPENINGS - Trimmers and trimming joists: When not specified otherwise, not less than 25 mm

wider than general joists. 820 VERTICAL RESTRAINT STRAPS - Manufacturer: Expamet Building Products. - Product reference: BAT Restraint Straps ‘Standard’. - Material/ finish: Galvanised steel - Size: - Cross section: 27.5 x 2.5mm cross section, with 100mm cranked end. - Length: 1200mm. - Centres: Not more than 1.2 m. - Fixing: - To timber members with not less than two 30 x 3.75mm galvanised nails. - To masonry with not less than 5 no. screws evenly spaced, with at least one

screw located within 150 mm of the bottom end of each strap. 830 LATERAL RESTRAINT STRAPS - Manufacturer: Expamet Building Products. - Product reference: BAT Restraint Straps ‘M305’. - Material/ finish: Galvanised steel. - Size: Not less than 30 x 5 mm cross section, 150 mm cranked end and 1500mm

long. - Fixing: To top of joists/ rafters/ ties at not more than 1.20m centres. - Ensure that cranked end is in tight contact with cavity face of wall inner leaf

and is not pointing upwards. - Straps spanning joists/ rafters/ ties running parallel to wall: Fix noggings and

packs tightly beneath straps. - Size of noggings and packs: Not less than three quarters of joist/ rafter/ tie

depth and not less than 38 mm thick. - Notching: Notch joists so that straps fit flush with surface. Do not notch

rafters/ ties. - Fasteners: Not less than four 50 mm x 8 gauge sherardized countersunk screws per

strap, evenly spread.

Page 10: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/9 specification/preambles

H60 PLAIN ROOF TILING To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TYPES OF TILING 105 CLAY ROOF TILING MAKE GOOD AFTER REMOVAL OF CHIMNEY - Substrate: Timber rafters. - Pitch: Various. - Underlay: Reinforced felt to BS747 type 1F. - Direction: Parallel to eaves. - Head-lap (minimum): 150mm. - Battens: As clause 245. - Size: 38 x 25 mm. - Fixing: As clause 265, using 65 mm x 3.35 mm galvanised smooth round nails. - Tiles: To match existing. - Head-lap (minimum): 65 mm. - Fixing: As clauses 275 and 280: Fixing of local areas: All tiles. Fixing of general areas: Two nails per tile every fifth course. - Other requirements: Insulation as clause P10/120/125 to give thickness of 250

mm. 120 CONCRETE ROOF TILING MAKE GOOD AFTER REMOVAL OF CHIMNEY - Substrate: Timber rafters. - Pitch: Various. - Underlay: Reinforced felt to BS747 type 1F. - Direction: Parallel to eaves. - Head-lap (minimum): 150mm. - Battens: As clause 245 - Size: 38 x 25 mm. - Fixing: As clause 265, using 65 mm x 3.35 mm galvanised smooth round nails. - Tiles: To match existing. - Head-lap (minimum): 65 mm. - Fixing: As clauses 275 and 280: Fixing of local areas: All tiles. Fixing of general areas: Two nails per tile every fifth course. - Other requirements: Insulation as Clause P10/120/130 to give total thickness of

250 mm. TILING GENERALLY 210 BASIC WORKMANSHIP - General: Fix tiling and accessories to make the whole sound and weathertight at

earliest opportunity. - Setting out: To true lines and regular appearance, with neat fit at edges,

junctions and features. - Fixings for tiling accessories: As recommended by tile or accessory manufacturer. - Gutters and pipes: Keep free of debris. Clean out at completion.

Page 11: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/10 specification/preambles

220 REMOVE EXISTING TILING - General: Carefully remove tiles, battens, underlay, etc. with minimum

disturbance of adjacent retained tiling. - Undamaged tiles: Set aside for reuse. 240 UNDERLAY - Handling: Do not tear or puncture. - Laying: Maintain consistent tautness. - Vertical laps (minimum): 100 mm wide, coinciding with supports and securely

fixed. - Fixing: Galvanized steel, copper or aluminium 20 x 3 mm extra large clout head

nails. - Eaves: Where exposed, underlay must be BS 8747, Annex B, type 5U, or equivalent

UV durable type. - Penetrations: Use proprietary underlay seals or cut underlay to give a watertight

fit around pipes and components. - Ventilation paths: Do not obstruct. 245 BATTENS/COUNTERBATTENS - TREATED - Timber: Sawn softwood. - Standard: BS 5534, clause 4.12.1. - Permissible characteristics and defects: Not to exceed limits in BS 5534, Annex

C. - Moisture content at time of fixing and covering (maximum): 22%. - Preservative treatment: As section Z12 and Wood Protection Association

Commodity Specification C8.

255 COUNTERBATTENS ON RIGID SARKING - Fixing: Through rigid sarking into rafters at not more than 300 mm centres. 265 BATTEN FIXING - Setting out: Align parallel to ridge in straight horizontal lines to gauge of tiles.

Align on adjacent areas. - Batten length (minimum): Sufficient to span over three supports. - Joints in length: Square cut. Butt centrally on supports. Joints must not occur

more than once in any group of four battens on one support. - Additional battens: Provide where unsupported laps in underlay occur between

battens. - Fixing: Each batten to each support. Splay fix at joints in length. 275 TILE FIXING - Setting out: Lay tiles to a half lap bond with joints slightly open. Align tails. - Ends of courses: Use tile and a half tiles to maintain bond and to ensure that cut

tiles are as large as possible. - Top and bottom courses: Use eaves/tops tiles to maintain gauge. - Perimeter tiles: - Verges, abutments and each side of valleys and hips: Twice nail end tile in

every course. - Eaves and top edges: Twice nail two courses of tiles or clip as appropriate. - Fixings for tiles: Nails/clips recommended by tile manufacturer.

Page 12: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/11 specification/preambles

280 LOCAL AND GENERAL FIXING AREAS - Definitions: - Local areas: Bands of tiling around all edges or obstructions of each plane of

the roof. Calculate extent of each band in accordance with BS 5534, section 5. - General areas: Remaining areas of roof tiling. ROOF TILING EDGES/ JUNCTIONS/ FEATURES 305 GENERALLY - Fittings and accessories: As recommended by tile manufacturer, do not improvise. - Exposed fittings and accessories: To match tile colour and finish. - Cut tiles: Cut only where necessary, to give straight, clean edges. - Flashings: Fix with or immediately after tiling. Form neatly. 325 FIRE SEPARATING WALLS - Separating walls: Completely fill space between top of wall and underside of tiles

with mineral wool quilt to provide fire stopping. - Boxed eaves: Completely seal air paths in plane of separating wall with wire

reinforced mineral wool, not less than 50 mm thick, fixed to rafters and carefully cut to shape to provide fire stopping.

365 UNVENTILATED EAVES - Underlay support: Timber. - Continuous to prevent water retaining troughs. - Gutter: Dress underlay or underlay support tray to form drip into gutter. - Undercourse and first course tiles: Fix with tails projecting 50 mm over gutter or

to centre of gutter, whichever dimension is the lesser. 740 MORTAR BEDDED RIDGES - Underlay: Lay courses over ridge. - Overlap (minimum): 100 mm. - Ridge tiles: - Manufacturer: Match existing. Product reference: Match existing. - Bedding: On mortar continuous to edges and solid to joints. - Fixing: Where rigid masonry walls support or abut ridge, secure ridge tiles

within 900 mm of such walls to ridge boards or supplementary ridge battens with nails/ wire ties or screws.

- Gable end ridge tiles: Fill ends with mortar and slips of tiles finished flush.

Page 13: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/12 specification/preambles

H65 SINGLE LAP ROOF TILING To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TYPES OF TILING 105 CLAY ROOF TILING MAKE GOOD AFTER REMOVAL OF CHIMNEY - Substrate: Timber rafters. - Pitch: Various. - Underlay: Reinforced felt to BS747 type 1F. - Direction: Parallel to eaves. - Head-lap (minimum): 150mm. - Battens: As clause 245. - Size: 38 x 25 mm. - Fixing: As clause 265, using 65 x 3.35 mm galvanised smooth round nails. - Tiles: To match existing. - Head-lap: As existing. - Fixing: As clauses 275 and 280: Fixing of local areas: All clipped. Fixing of general areas: Not required. - Other requirements: Insulation as Clause P10/120/130 to give total thickness. 115 CONCRETE ROOF TILING MAKE GOOD AFTER REMOVAL OF CHIMNEY - Substrate: Timber rafters. - Pitch: Various. - Underlay: Reinforced felt to BS747 type 1F. - Direction: Parallel to eaves. - Head-lap (minimum): 150mm. - Battens: As clause 245. - Size: 38 x 25 mm. - Fixing: As clause 265, using 65 x 3.35 mm galvanised smooth round nails. - Tiles: To match existing. - Head-lap: As existing. - Fixing: As clauses 275 and 280: Fixing of local areas: All clipped. Fixing of general areas: Not required. - Other requirements: Insulation as Clause P10/120/130 to give total thickness of

250 mm. TILING GENERALLY 210 BASIC WORKMANSHIP - General: Fix tiling and accessories to make the whole sound and weathertight at

earliest opportunity. - Setting out: To true lines and regular appearance, with neat fit at edges,

junctions and features. - Fixings for accessories: As recommended by tile manufacturer. - Gutters and pipes: Keep free of debris. Clean out at completion.

Page 14: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/13 specification/preambles

220 REMOVING EXISTING TILING - General: Carefully remove tiles, battens, underlay, etc. with minimum

disturbance of adjacent retained tiling. - Undamaged tiles: Set aside for reuse. 240 UNDERLAY - Handling: Do not tear or puncture. - Laying: Maintain consistent tautness. - Vertical laps (minimum): 100 mm wide, coinciding with supports and securely

fixed. - Fixing: Galvanized steel, copper or aluminium 20 x 3 mm clout head nails. - Eaves: Where exposed, underlay must be BS 747/ BS 5534, Annex A Type 5U, or an

equivalent UV durable type. - Penetrations: Use proprietary underlay seals or cut underlay to give a watertight

fit around pipes and components. - Ventilation paths: Do not obstruct. 245 BATTENS/ COUNTERBATTENS - TREATED - Timber: Sawn softwood. - Standard: BS 5534, clause 4.12.1. - Permissible characteristics and defects: Not to exceed limits in BS 5534 annex C. - Moisture content at time of fixing and covering (maximum): 22%. - Preservative treatment: As section Z12 and British Wood Preserving and Damp-

proofing Association Commodity Specification C8. 255 COUNTERBATTENS ON RIGID SARKING - Fixing: Through rigid sarking into rafters at not more than 300 mm centres. 265 BATTEN FIXING - Setting out: Align parallel to ridge in straight horizontal lines to the gauge of the

tile. Align on adjacent areas. - Batten length (minimum): Sufficient to span over three supports. - Joints in length: Square cut. Butt centrally on supports. Joints must not occur

more than once in any group of four battens on one support. - Additional battens: Provide where unsupported laps in underlay occur between

battens. - Fixing: Each batten to each support. Splay fix at joints in length. 275 TILE FIXING - Setting out: Lay each course with tails aligned. - Ends of courses: Use special tiles to maintain bond and to ensure that cut tiles are

as large as possible. - Perimeter tiles: Fix tiles in eaves and top courses, and at verges, abutments and

each side of valleys and hips. - Nail fixed tiles: Use nails recommended by tile manufacturer. Fix through every

hole. - Clip fixed tiles: Use clips recommended by tile manufacturer.

Page 15: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/14 specification/preambles

280 LOCAL AND GENERAL FIXING AREAS - Definitions: - Local areas: Bands of tiling around edges or obstructions of each plane of the

roof. Calculate extent of each band in accordance with BS 5534, section 5. - General areas: Remaining areas of roof tiling. 290 MORTAR BEDDING/ POINTING - Mortar: As section Z21, 1:3 cement:sand, with plasticizing admixtures permitted. - Bond strength providing resistance to uplift: To BS 5534. - Weather: Do not use in wet or frosty conditions or when imminent. - Preparation of tiles and accessories to be bedded: Wet and drain surface water

before fixing. - Appearance: Finish neatly as work proceeds and remove residue. 295 MORTAR BEDDED DENTIL COURSES - Dentil tile slips: Place in mortar edge bedding of hip and ridge tiles, one to each

roof tile pan, projecting a consistent dimension. EDGES/ JUNCTIONS/ FEATURES 305 GENERALLY - Fittings and accessories: As recommended by tile manufacturer. Do not improvise. - Exposed fittings and accessories: To match tile colour and finish. - Cut tiles: Cut only where necessary, to give straight, clean edges. - Flashings: Fix with or immediately after tiling. Form neatly. 325 FIRE SEPARATING WALLS - Separating walls: Completely fill space between top of wall and underside of tiles

with mineral wool quilt to provide fire stopping. - Boxed eaves: Completely seal air paths in plane of separating wall with wire

reinforced mineral wool, not less than 50 mm thick, fixed to rafters and carefully cut to shape to provide fire stopping.

- Gutter: Dress underlay or underlay support tray to form drip into gutter. - Eaves filler units for profiled tiles: Fix to close underside of first course tiles. - First course tiles: Fix with tails projecting 50 mm over gutter or to centre of

gutter, whichever dimension is the lesser. 365 EAVES - Underlay support: Timber. - Continuous to prevent water retaining troughs. - Gutter: Dress underlay or underlay support tray to form drip into gutter. - Eaves filler units for profiled tiles: Fix to close underside of first course tiles. - First course tiles: Fix with tails projecting 50 mm over gutter or to centre of

gutter, whichever dimension is the lesser.

Page 16: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/15 specification/preambles

740 MORTAR BEDDED RIDGES - Underlay: Lay courses over ridge. - Overlap (minimum): 150 mm. - Ridge tiles: - Manufacturer: To match existing. Product reference: To match existing. - Bedding: On mortar, continuous to edges and solid to joints. - Fixing: Where rigid masonry walls support or abut ridge, secure ridge tiles

within 900 mm of such walls to ridge boards or supplementary ridge battens with nails/ wire ties or screws.

- Gable end ridge tiles: Fill ends with mortar and slips of tiles finished flush.

Page 17: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/16 specification/preambles

H71 LEAD SHEET COVERINGS/ FLASHINGS To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TYPES OF LEADWORK 480 LEAD SLATES - Lead: - Thickness: 1.75 to 2.00mm (Code 4). - Dimensions: - Base: Not less than 400 x 400 mm. - Upstand: Not less than 150 mm, to fit pipe and at angle to suit roof pitch. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK 510 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY - Standard: To BS 6915 and latest edition of ‘Rolled lead sheet. The complete

manual’ published by the Lead Sheet Association. - Fabrication and fixing: To provide a secure, free draining and completely

weathertight installation. - Operatives: Trained in the application of lead coverings/ flashings. Submit records

of experience on request. - Preforming: Measure, mark, cut and form lead prior to assembly wherever

possible. - Marking out: With pencil, chalk or crayon. Do not use scribers or other sharp

instruments without approval. - Bossing and forming: Straight and regular bends, leaving sheets free from ripples,

kinks, buckling and cracks. - Solder: Use only where specified. - Sharp metal edges: Fold under or remove as work proceeds. - Finished work: Fully supported, adequately fixed to resist wind uplift but also able

to accommodate thermal movement without distortion or stress. - Protection: Prevent staining, discolouration and damage by subsequent works. 520 LEAD SHEET - Production method: - Rolled, to BS EN 12588, or - Machine cast, Agrément certified and to code thicknesses with a tolerance (by

weight) of ±5%, or - Sand cast, from lead free from bitumen, solder, other impurities, inclusions,

laminations, cracks, air, pinholes and blowholes; to code thicknesses but with a tolerance (by weight) of ±10%.

- Identification: Labelled to show thickness/ code, weight and type. 610 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES - Condition: Dry and free of dust, debris, grease and other deleterious matter.

Page 18: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/17 specification/preambles

JOINTING LEAD 810 FORMING DETAILS - Method: Bossing or leadwelding except where bossing is specifically required. - Leadwelded seams: Neatly and consistently formed. - Seams: Do not undercut or reduce sheet thickness. - Filler strips: Of the same composition as the sheets being joined. - Butt joints: Formed to a thickness one third more than the sheets being joined. - Lap joints: Formed with 25 mm laps and two loadings to the edge of the

overlap. - Bossing: Carried out without thinning, cutting or otherwise splitting the lead

sheet.

970 PATINATION OIL - Manufacturer: Contractors choice. - Application: As soon as practical, apply a smear coating to lead, evenly in one

direction and in dry conditions.

Page 19: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/18 specification/preambles

J30 LIQUID APPLIED TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TYPES OF TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING 130 COLD APPLIED DAMP PROOFING - Substrate: Existing concrete. - Coating: - Manufacturer: Ruberoid Building Products. Product reference: Synthaprufe. - Application: Two coats, first coat 1m2/litre and second coat 1.5m2/litre. - Blinding: Clean sharp sand as clause 270. EXECUTION 205 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATE - Substrates generally: - Smooth, even textured, clean, dry and frost free. - Within tolerances for level and surface regularity. - Vertical and horizontal surfaces: Correctly prepared and free from

irregularities. - Curing period for concrete substrates (minimum): 7 days. - Moisture content and stability of substrate: Must not impair integrity of finished

tanking/ damp proofing. - Preliminary work: Complete including: - Chases. - External angles. - Formation of upstands and kerbs. - Movement joints. - Penetrations/ Outlets. 210 COATING APPLICATION - Adjacent surfaces exposed to view in finished work: Protect. - Coatings: - Apply in dry atmospheric conditions. - Uniform, continuous coverage. Do not allow to pool in hollows. - Firmly adhered to substrate and free from imperfections. - Prevent damage to finished coatings. - Penetrations: Impervious. - Final covering: Apply as soon as possible after coating has hardened. 260 JUNCTIONS WITH DPCS - DPCs: Clean, all edges fully exposed. - Application: Fully coat dpc and overlap adjacent surfaces by (minimum) 50 mm. 270 BLINDING - Coatings: Blind whilst still tacky. - Surplus material: Remove when coatings are completely dry.

Page 20: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/19 specification/preambles

K10 PLASTERBOARD DRY LININGS/ PARTITIONS/ CEILINGS To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TYPES OF DRY LINING 185 WALL LINING SYSTEM (ADHESIVE) TO KITCHENS - Manufacturer: British Gypsum. - Product reference: Dryliner basic. - Wall: Painted brickwork. - Adhesive method: Dabs as clause 620. - Linings: 12.5 wallboard. - Finishing: Skim coat plaster as clause 680. - Primer/Sealer: Not required. - Accessories: Angle beads as clause 695. - Other requirements: Fix wall units with wall plugs and screws through to

background wall and extra dabs at fixing point. 205 LINING ON TIMBER STUD PARTITIONS - Background: Studs at 450 or 600mm centres. - Linings: 12.5 mm plasterboard. - Fixings: Nails. - Finishing: Skim coat plaster as clause 680. - Primer/ Sealer: Not required. - Accessories: Angle beads as clause 695. 245 CEILING LINING ON TIMBER JOISTS - Background: Existing joists at 450 or 600mm centres. - Linings: 12.5 mm plasterboard. - Fixings: Nails. - Finishing: Skim coat plaster as clause 680 or texture coating as required. - Primer/ Sealer: Not required. - Accessories: 125mm Gyproc coving when specified by CA. INSTALLATION 335 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS - Framing: Accurately position and securely fix to give full support to: - Partition heads running parallel with, but offset from main structural supports. - Fixtures, fittings and service outlets. Mark framing positions clearly and

accurately on linings. - Board edges and lining perimeters, as recommended by board manufacturer to

suit type and performance of lining. 375 NEW WET LAID BASES - Dpcs: Install under full width of partitions/ freestanding wall linings. - Material: Bituminous sheet or plastics.

Page 21: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/20 specification/preambles

435 DRY LININGS GENERALLY - General: Use fixing, jointing, sealing and finishing materials, components and

installation methods recommended by board manufacturer. - Cutting plasterboards: Neatly and accurately without damaging core or tearing

paper facing. - Cut edges: Minimize and position at internal angles wherever possible. Mask

with bound edges of adjacent boards at external corners. - Fixings boards: Securely and firmly to suitably prepared and accurately levelled

backgrounds. - Finishing: Neatly to give flush, smooth, flat surfaces free from bowing and abrupt

changes of level. 445 CEILINGS - Sequence: Fix boards to ceilings before installing dry lined walls and partitions. - Orientation of boards: Fix with bound edges at right angles to supports and with

ends staggered in adjacent rows. - Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers. 560 JOINTS BETWEEN BOARDS - Tapered edged plasterboards: - Bound edges: Lightly butted. - Cut/unbound edges: 3 mm gap. - Square edged plasterboards: 3 mm gap. - Square edged fibre reinforced gypsum boards: 5 mm gap. 565 VERTICAL JOINTS - Joints: Centre on studs. - Partitions: Stagger joints on opposite sides of studs. - Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers. 570 HORIZONTAL JOINTS - Surfaces exposed to view: Horizontal joints not permitted. Seek instructions

where height of partition/ lining exceeds maximum available length of board. - Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers by at least 600 mm. - Edges of boards: Support using additional framing. - Two layer boarding: Support edges of outer layer. 580 INSULATION BACKED PLASTERBOARD - General: Do not damage or cut away insulation to accommodate services. - Installation at corners: Carefully cut back insulation or plasterboard as

appropriate along edges of boards to give a continuous plasterboard face, with no gaps in insulation.

610 FIXING PLASTERBOARD TO TIMBER - Fixing to timber: Securely at the following centres (maximum): - Nails: 150 mm. - Screws to partitions/ wall linings: 300 mm. Reduce to 200 mm at external

angles. - Screws to ceilings: 230 mm. - Position of nails/ screws from edges of boards (minimum): - Bound edges: 10 mm. - Cut/ unbound edges: 13 mm. - Position of nails/ screws from edges of timber supports (minimum): 6 mm.

Page 22: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/21 specification/preambles

620 FIXING PLASTERBOARD WITH ADHESIVE DABS - Setting out boards: Accurately aligned and plumb. - Fixing to substrates: Securely using adhesive dabs. - Adhesive dab spacings for each board: - Horizontally: One row along top edge and one continuous dab along bottom

edge. - Vertically: One row along each edge and thereafter at intermediate spacings to

suit size of board: Thickness (mm) Width (mm) Dab centres (mm) 9.5 1200 400 9.5/12.5 900 450 12.5 1200 600 - Adhesive dab dimensions (width x length): At least 50–75 mm x 250 mm. - Position of dabs from edges/ ends of boards (minimum): 25 mm. 625 FIXING INSULATION BACKED PLASTERBOARD WITH ADHESIVE DABS - Fixing to substrates: In addition to adhesive dab fixings, secure boards with

nailable plugs in locations recommended by board manufacturer. 630 FIXING INSULATION BACKED PLASTERBOARD WITH ADHESIVE SPOTS - Setting out boards: Accurately aligned and plumb. - Fixing to substrates: Securely using adhesive spots and mechanical fastenings. - Adhesive spot spacings to each board: Four vertical rows, at 400 mm centres in

each row. - Adhesive spot diameters (minimum): 25 mm. - Mechanical fasteners: Nailable plugs in locations recommended by board

manufacturer. FINISHING 650 LEVEL OF DRY LINING ACROSS JOINTS - Sudden irregularities: Not permitted. - Joint deviations: Measure from faces of adjacent boards using methods and

straightedges (450 mm long with feet/ pads) to BS 8212, clause 3.3.5. - Tapered edge joints: Permissible deviation (maximum) across joints when measured with feet resting

on boards: 3 mm. - External angles: Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 4 mm. - Internal angles: Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 5 mm. 670 SEAMLESS JOINTING TO PLASTERBOARDS - Cut edges of boards: Lightly sand to remove paper burrs. - Filling and taping: Fill joints, gaps and internal angles with jointing compound and

cover with continuous lengths of paper tape, fully bedded. - Protection of edges/ corners: Reinforce external angles, stop ends, etc. with

specified edge/ angle bead. - Finishing: Apply jointing compound. Feather out each application beyond previous

application to give a flush, smooth, seamless surface. - Nail/ screw depressions: Fill with jointing compound to give a flush surface. - Minor imperfections: Remove by light sanding.

Page 23: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/22 specification/preambles

680 SKIM COAT PLASTER FINISH - Plaster type: British Gypsum Ltd, Thistle Multi Finish. - Thickness: 2-3 mm. - Joints: Fill and tape except where coincident with metal beads. - Finish: Tight, matt, smooth surface with no hollows, abrupt changes of level or

trowel marks. 695 INSTALLING BEADS/ STOPS - Cutting: Neatly using mitres at return angles. - Fixing: Securely using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line and

level, ensuring full contact of wings with substrate. - Finishing: After joint compounds/ plasters have been applied, remove surplus

material while still wet from surfaces of beads exposed to view. 725 REPAIRS TO EXISTING PLASTERBOARD - Filling small areas with broken cores: Cut away paper facing, remove loose core

material and fill with jointing compound. - Finish: Flush, smooth surface suitable for redecoration. - Large patch repairs: Cut out damaged area and form neat hole with rectangular

sides. Replace with matching plasterboard. - Fixing: Use methods to suit type of dry lining, ensuring full support to all edges

of existing and new plasterboard. - Finishing: Fill joints, tape and apply jointing compound to give a flush, smooth

surface suitable for redecoration. 740 CERAMIC FINISHES for DriLyner, DriLyner TL, DriLyner SI, DriLyner RF and DriLyner

MF: Allow lining to stand for 7 days prior to commencing tiling.

Page 24: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/23 specification/preambles

K11 RIGID SHEET FLOORING/ SHEATHING/ DECKING/ SARKING/ LININGS/ CASINGS To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TYPES OF FLOORING/ SHEATHING/ DECKING/ SARKING/ LINING/ CASING 715 PLYWOOD UNDERLAY - Substrate: Existing softwood floor on timber joists. - Condition: Sound and acceptably level. - Preparation: Gross irregularities removed or filled. Protruding fasteners

removed or punched in. - Underlay: Plywood to an approved national standard. - Bonding quality to BS EN 314-2: Class 3. - Appearance class to BS EN 635: Class IV. - Finish: Sanded. - Thickness: 6.5 mm. - Sheet size: 2400 x 1200 mm. - Setting out: End joints staggered and a 0.5-1 mm gap between adjacent sheets.

Joints in underlay offset from joints in substrate. - Fixing: - Fasteners: 25 mm annular ringed shank or square twisted nails. Fastener heads: Set flush with sheet surface. - Fixing centres: 150 mm grid over each sheet commencing at centre. Maximum

100 mm centres around perimeter, set in 12 mm from edges. 815 PLYWOOD SOIL PIPE CASING - Substrate: Softwood framing. - Additional supports: As clause 930. - Plywood: Manufactured to an approved national standard. - Bonding quality to BS EN 314-2: Class 2. - Appearance class to BS EN 635: Class IV. - Finish: Unsanded. - Thickness: 6.5 mm. - Edges: Square. - Setting out: Long edges running across. - Gap between adjacent boards: 1.0 mm. - Fixing to supports: - Fasteners: 25 mm screws. - Fixing centres (maximum): Around board edges: 150 mm. Along intermediate supports: 300 mm. - Fixing distance from edges (minimum): 10 mm. - Accessories: Cups and caps for screws.

Page 25: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/24 specification/preambles

WORKMANSHIP 910 INSTALLATION GENERALLY - Timing: Building to be weathertight before fixing boards internally. - Moisture content of timber supports (maximum): 18%. - Joints between boards: Accurately aligned, of constant width and parallel to

perimeter edges. - Methods of fixing, and fasteners: As section Z20 where not specified otherwise. 930 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS - Additional studs, noggings/ dwangs (Scot) and battens: - Provision: In accordance with board manufacturer’s recommendations and as

follows: Tongue and groove jointed rigid board areas: To all unsupported perimeter

edges. Butt jointed rigid board areas: To all unsupported edges. - Size: Not less than 50 mm wide and of adequate thickness. - Quality of timber: As for adjacent timber supports. - Treatment (where required): As for adjacent timber supports. 940 BOARD MOISTURE CONTENT AND CONDITIONING - Moisture content of boards at time of fixing: Appropriate to end use. - Conditioning regime: Submit proposals. 960 FIXING GENERALLY - Boards/ sheets: Fixed securely to each support without distortion and true to line

and level. - Fasteners: Evenly spaced in straight lines and, unless otherwise recommended by

board manufacturer, in pairs across joints. - Distance from edge of board/ sheet: Sufficient to prevent damage. - Surplus adhesive: Removed as the work proceeds. 980 OPEN JOINTS - Perimeter joints, expansion joints and joints between boards: Free from plaster,

mortar droppings and other debris. - Temporary wedges and packings: Removed on completion of board fixing. 990 ACCESS PANELS - Size and position: Agree before boards are fixed. - Additional noggings/ dwangs (Scot), battens, etc: Provide and fix as necessary.

Page 26: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/25 specification/preambles

K20 TIMBER BOARD FLOORING/ SARKING/ LININGS/ CASINGS To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TYPES OF FLOORING/ SARKING/ LININGS/ CASINGS 110 TIMBER BOARD FLOORING AFTER REMOVAL OF CHIMNEY STACK - Substrate: Timber joists at 450mm centres. - Boards: Tongued and grooved softwood to BS 1297. - Finished face width (exposed width after fixing): To match existing. - Finished thickness: To match existing. - Moisture content at time of fixing: Notwithstanding BS 1297, clause 6.1,

moisture content to be 9-13%. - Fixing: As clause 370 40 mm oval Brad Head nails, two per board. WORKMANSHIP 310 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY - Protection during and after installation: Keep boards dry. Protect from dirt, stain

and damage until Completion. - Boards to be used internally: Do not install until building is watertight. - Methods of fixing, and fasteners: As section Z20. - Moisture content of timber supports at time of fixing boards: Not more than 18%. 350 TREATED TIMBER - Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and/ or drilling: Treat with two flood coats of a

solution recommended by main treatment solution manufacturer. 370 FIXING BOARDS - Environmental conditions: Do not fix boards when ambient temperature is at or

below 0°C, or above 30°C. - Generally: Fix boards securely to each support to give flat, true surfaces free from

undulations, lipping, splits and protruding fasteners. - Wood movement: Position boards and fixings to prevent cupping. springing,

excessive opening of joints and other defects. - Heading joints: Tightly butted, central over supports and at least two board

widths apart on any one support. - Edges: Plane off proud edges. - Exposed nail heads: Neatly punch below surface.

Page 27: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/26 specification/preambles

L20 DOORS/ SHUTTERS/ HATCHES To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. PRODUCTS 230 INTERNAL WOOD FLUSH DOORS - Manufacturer: Jeld-Wed UK. - Product reference: Silverwood flush door. - Facings: 2.5mm hardboard. - - Preservative treatment: Not required. - Finish as delivered: Prepared and primed. - Other requirements: Ironmongery specified elsewhere.

EXECUTION 710 PROTECTION OF COMPONENTS - General: Do not deliver to site components that cannot be installed immediately

or placed in clean, dry, floored and covered storage. - Stored components: Stacked on level bearers, separated with spacers to prevent

damage by and to projecting ironmongery, beads, etc. 730 PRIMING/SEALING - Wood surfaces inaccessible after installation: Primed or sealed as specified before

fixing components. 790 FIXING OF WOOD FRAMES - Spacing of fixings (frames not predrilled): Maximum 150 mm from ends of each

jamb and at 600 mm maximum centres. 830 FIXING IRONMONGERY GENERALLY - Fasteners: Supplied by ironmongery manufacturer. - Finish/ Corrosion resistance: To match ironmongery. - Holes for components: No larger than required for satisfactory fit/ operation. - Adjacent surfaces: Undamaged. - Moving parts: Adjusted, lubricated and functioning correctly at completion. 850 LOCATION OF HINGES - Primary hinges: Where not specified otherwise, positioned with centre lines 250

mm from top and bottom of door leaf. - Third hinge: Where specified, positioned on centre of door leaf. - Hinges for fire resisting doors: Positioned in accordance with door leaf

manufacturer's recommendations.

Page 28: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/27 specification/preambles

M10 CEMENT BASED LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TYPES OF SCREED 130 PROPRIETARY QUICK DRYING LEVELLING SCREEDS TO BATHROOM FLOORS - Substrate: Existing slab. - Screed manufacturer: Ardex UK Limited. - Product reference: A35 Mix. - Screed construction: Bonding as clause 270. - Thickness

- Nominal: 75mm. - Minimum: 50 mm. - Mix: Premixed by manufacturer. - Finish: - Method: Trowelled to fall minimum 1:30. - To receive: Safety flooring. GENERALLY/ PREPARATION 210 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES - General: - Suitable for specified levels and flatness/regularity of finished surfaces.

Consider permissible minimum and maximum thicknesses of screeds. - Sound and free from significant cracks and gaps. - Concrete strength: To BS 8204-1, Table 2. - Cleanliness: Remove plaster, debris and dirt. - Moisture content: To suit screed type. New concrete slabs to receive fully or

partially bonded construction must be dried out by exposure to the air for minimum six weeks.

220 PROPRIETARY LEVELLING/WEARING SCREEDS - General: Materials, mix proportions, mixing methods, minimum/maximum

thicknesses and workmanship must be in accordance with recommendations of screed manufacturer.

- Standard: To BS 8204-3. 270 PARTIALLY BONDED CONSTRUCTION - Preparation: Generally in accordance with BS 8204-1. - Substrate surface: Brushed finish with no surface laitance. - Texture of surface: Suitable to accept screed and achieve a bond over complete

area. - Bonding coat: Ardex P51 by Ardex UK Limited.

Page 29: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/28 specification/preambles

BATCHING/ MIXING 330 MIXING - Water content: Minimum necessary to achieve full compaction, low enough to

prevent excessive water being brought to surface during compaction. - Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency. Mixes other than no-fines

must be mixed in a suitable forced action mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall drum type mixer.

- Consistency: Use while sufficiently plastic for full compaction. - Ready-mixed retarded screed mortar: Use within working time and site

temperatures recommended by manufacturer. Do not retemper. 340 ADVERSE WEATHER - Screeds surface temperature: Maintain above 5° C for a minimum of four days

after laying. - Hot weather: Prevent premature setting or drying out. LAYING 355 FLATNESS/SURFACE REGULARITY OF FLOOR SCREEDS - Standard: To BS 8204-1, Table 5. - Test: To BS 8204-1, Annex C. - Sudden irregularities: Not permitted. 375 COMPACTION OF SCREEDS - General: Compact thoroughly over entire area. - Screeds over 50 mm thick: Lay in two layers of approximately equal thickness.

Roughen surface of compacted lower layer then immediately lay upper layer. FINISHING/ CURING 510 FINISHING GENERALLY - Timing: Carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to setting

and hardening of screed material. - Prohibited treatments to screed surfaces: - Wetting to assist surface working. - Sprinkling cement. 530 SMOOTH FLOATED FINISH - Finish: Even texture with no ridges or steps. 540 TROWELLED FINISH TO LEVELLING SCREEDS - Floating: To an even texture with no ridges or steps. - Trowelling: To a uniform, smooth but not polished surface, free from trowel

marks and other blemishes, and suitable to receive specified flooring material.

Page 30: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/29 specification/preambles

M20 PLASTERED/ RENDERED/ ROUGHCAST COATING To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TYPES OF COATING 200 GYPSUM PLASTER ON CEMENT GAUGED UNDERCOATS - Substrate: Brickwork. - Preparation: Hacking surface as clause 531. - Undercoats: Mix to be one of the following: - 1:1:5 to 1:1:6 (cement:lime:sand) using Portland cement and ready mixed

lime:sand mortar. - 1:5 to 1:6 (cement:sand and plasticizer) using Portland cement and an air

entraining admixture. - 1:4 to 1:5 (masonry cement:sand) using masonry cement (with air entraining

agent). - Thickness (excluding dubbing out and keys): 12 mm. - Final coat: Gypsum plaster to BS EN 13279-1, class B. - Manufacturer: Contractors choice. - Product reference: British Gypsum Thistle. - Thickness: 2 mm. - Finish: Smooth as clause 777. - Accessories: Beads and stops as clause 630. MATERIALS AND MAKING OF MORTAR 430 READY-TO-USE CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS - Time and temperature limitations: Use within limits prescribed by mortar

manufacturer. - Retempering: Restore workability with water only within prescribed time limits. 438 CEMENTS FOR MORTARS - Cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked. - Types: Portland cement, CEM I. Portland slag cement, CEM II. Portland fly ash cement, CEM II. - Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5. - White cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked. - Type: Portland cement, CEM I. - Strength class: 52.5. - Sulphate resisting Portland cement: To BS 4027 and Kitemarked. - Strength class: 42.5. - Masonry cement: To BS EN 998-1 and Kitemarked. 440 SAND FOR CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS - Standard: To BS EN 13139. - Grading: 0/2 or 0/4 (CP or MP); category 2 fines. - Colour and texture: Consistent. Obtain from one source.

Page 31: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/30 specification/preambles

443 LIME FOR CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS - Standard: To BS EN 459-1. - Type: CL 90S. 445 PIGMENT FOR COLOURED MORTARS - Standard: To BS EN 12878. 449 ADMIXTURES FOR CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS - Suitable admixtures: Select from: - Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS EN 934-2 and compatible with

other mortar constituents. - Other admixtures: Submit proposals. - Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride and any admixture containing calcium

chloride. 495 MIXING - Render mortars (site-made): - Batching: By volume. Use clean and accurate gauge boxes or buckets. - Mix proportions: Based on damp sand. Adjust for dry sand. - Lime:sand: Mix thoroughly. Allow to stand, without drying out, for at least 16

hours before using. - Mixes: Of uniform consistence and free from lumps. Do not retemper or

reconstitute mixes. - Contamination: Prevent intermixing with other materials. 497 COLD WEATHER - General: Do not use frozen materials or apply coatings on frozen or frost bound

substrates. - External work: Avoid when air temperature is at or below 5°C and falling or below

3°C and rising. Maintain temperature of work above freezing until coatings have fully hardened.

- Internal work: Take precautions to enable internal coating work to proceed without detriment when air temperature is below 3°C.

PREPARING SUBSTRATES 510 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES - Soundness: Free from loose areas and significant cracks and gaps. - Cutting, chasing, making good, fixing of conduits and services outlets and the like:

Completed. - Tolerances: Permitting specified flatness/ regularity of finished coatings. - Cleanliness: Free from dirt, dust, efflorescence and mould, and other

contaminants incompatible with coatings. 541 BONDING AGENT APPLICATION - General: Apply evenly to substrate to achieve effective bond of plaster/ render

coat. Protect adjacent surfaces.

Page 32: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/31 specification/preambles

566 REMOVING DEFECTIVE EXISTING PLASTER - Plaster for removal: Detached, soft, friable, badly cracked, affected by

efflorescence or otherwise damaged. - Stained plaster: Remove . - Removing defective plaster. Cut back to a square, sound edge. - Faults in substrate (structural deficiencies, damp, etc.): Submit proposals. - Cracks: - Fine hairline cracking/ crazing: Leave. - Dust and loose material: Remove from exposed substrates and edges. 568 EXISTING DAMP AFFECTED PLASTER/RENDER - Plaster affected by rising damp: Remove to a height of 300 mm above highest

point reached by damp or 1 m above dpc, whichever is higher. - Perished and salt contaminated masonry: - Mortar joints: Rake out. - Masonry units: Submit proposals. - Faults in substrate (structural deficiencies, additional sources of damp, etc.):

Submit proposals. - Drying out substrates: Established drying conditions. Leave walls to dry for as long

as possible before plastering. - Dust and loose material: Remove from exposed substrates and edges. BACKINGS/ BEADS/ JOINTS 630 BEADS/ STOPS FOR INTERNAL USE - Material: Galvanized steel to BS 13658-1. 640 BEADS/ STOPS GENERALLY - Location: External angles and stop ends, except where specified otherwise. - Corners: Neat mitres at return angles. - Fixing: Secure, using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line and

level, ensuring full contact of wings with substrate. - Beads/ stops for external render: Fix mechanically. - Finishing: After coatings have been applied remove surplus material, while still

wet, from surfaces of beads/ stops exposed to view. 646 CRACK CONTROL AT JUNCTIONS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR SOLID SUBSTRATES - Locations: Where defined movement joints are not required. Where dissimilar

solid substrate materials are in same plane and rigidly bonded or tied together. - Crack control materials: - Isolating layer: Building paper to BS 1521. - Metal lathing: Galvanised. - Installation: Fix metal lathing over isolating layer. Stagger fixings along both edges

of lathing. - Width of installation over single junctions: - Isolating layer: 150 mm. - Lathing: 300 mm. - Width of installation across face of dissimilar substrate material (column, beam,

etc. with face width not greater than 450 mm): - Isolating layer: 25 mm (minimum) beyond junctions with adjacent substrate. - Lathing: 100 mm (minimum) beyond edges of isolating layer.

Page 33: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/32 specification/preambles

INTERNAL PLASTERING 710 APPLICATION GENERALLY - Application of coatings: Firmly and in one continuous operation between angles

and joints. Achieve good adhesion. - Appearance of finished surfaces: Even and consistent. Free from rippling, hollows,

ridges, cracks and crazing. - Accuracy: Finish to a true plane, to correct line and level, with angles and

corners to a right angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals plumb and square.

- Drying out: Prevent excessively rapid or localized drying out. 715 FLATNESS/SURFACE REGULARITY - Sudden irregularities: Not permitted. - Deviation of plaster surface: Measure from underside of a straight edge placed

anywhere on surface. - Permissible deviation (maximum) for plaster not less than 13 mm thick: 3 mm in

any consecutive length of 1800 mm. 720 DUBBING OUT - General: Correct substrate inaccuracies. - New smooth, dense concrete and similar surfaces: Dubbing out prohibited unless

total plaster thickness is within range recommended by plaster manufacturer. - Thickness of any one coat (maximum): 10 mm. - Mix: As undercoat. - Application: Achieve firm bond. Allow each coat to set sufficiently before the next

is applied. Cross scratch surface of each coat. 725 UNDERCOATS GENERALLY - General: Rule to an even surface. Cross scratch to provide a key for the next coat. - Undercoats on metal lathing: Work well into interstices to obtain maximum key. - Undercoats gauged with Portland cement: Do not apply next coat until drying

shrinkage is substantially complete. 777 SMOOTH FINISH - Appearance: A tight, matt, smooth surface with no hollows, abrupt changes of

level or trowel marks. Avoid water brush, excessive trowelling and over polishing. 778 WOOD FLOAT FINISH - Appearance: An even overall texture. Finish with a dry wood float as soon as wet

sheen has disappeared.

Page 34: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/33 specification/preambles

M40 STONE/ CONCRETE/ QUARRY/ CERAMIC TILING/ MOSAIC To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TYPES OF TILING/ MOSAIC 110 TILING TO BATHROOM/WC - Tiles: Ceramic. - Manufacturer/Supplier: H & R Johnson. Product reference: PRG1. - Colour: White. - Finish: Plain. - Size: 150 x 150mm. - Thickness: 6.5mm. - Background/Base: Existing or new plaster. - Intermediate substrate: Not required. - Bedding: Thin bed adhesive as clause 650 or 651. - Adhesive: BAL Grip. - Joint width: 2mm. - Grout: BAL Waterproof grout, colour white. - Tiling: All tiling to line through. - 300mm high (2 courses) on walls around bath. - 1800mm high (12 courses) full height on walls around bath with a shower. - 2300mm high (15 courses) full height on walls around shower tray. - 300mm high (2 courses) above wash basins. Incorporate window cill and reveals

where applicable. 112 TILING TO KITCHEN - Tiles: Ceramic. - Manufacturer/Supplier: H & R Johnson. - Product reference and colour: - PRG01 White. - PRG23 Rice. - PRG24 Storm Grey. - PRG31 Oyster. - PRG35 Redwood. - PRG36 Peach Sorbet. - PRG50 Sunhaze. - Finish: Plain. - Size: 150 x 150mm. - Thickness: 6.5mm. - Background/Base: Existing and new plaster. - Intermediate substrate: Not required. - Bedding: Thin bed adhesive as clause 650 or 651. - Adhesive: BAL Grip. - Joint width: 2mm. - Grout: BAL Waterproof grout, colour white. - Accessories: Tile trim to all exposed edges to match coloured tiling. - Tiling: All tiling to line through. - 450mm high (3 courses) on walls above length and return of worktops.

Incorporate window cill and reveals where applicable. - 1350mm high (9 courses) x full width on walls to cooker space.

Page 35: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/34 specification/preambles

PREPARATION 310 EXISTING BACKGROUNDS/ BASES GENERALLY - Efflorescence, laitance, dirt and other loose material: Remove. - Deposits of oil, grease and other materials incompatible with the bedding:

Remove. - Tile, paint and other nonporous surfaces: Clean. - Wet backgrounds: Dry before tiling. 330 EXISTING PLASTER - Defective areas: Remove plaster that is loose, soft, friable, badly cracked or

affected by efflorescence. Cut back to straight horizontal and vertical edges. - Making good: Use plaster or nonshrinking filler. 360 EXISTING PAINT - Paint with unsatisfactory adhesion: Remove so as not to impair bedding adhesion. 380 NEW PLASTER - Plaster: Dry, solidly bedded, free from dust and friable matter. - Plaster primer: Apply if recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 390 PLASTERBOARD BACKGROUNDS - Boards: Dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings and face to receive

decorative finish exposed. FIXING 510 FIXING GENERALLY - Colour/ shade: Unintended variations within tiles for use in each area/ room are

not permitted. - Variegated tiles: Mix thoroughly. - Adhesive: Compatible with background/ base. Prime if recommended by adhesive

manufacturer. - Cut tiles: Neat and accurate. - Fixing: Provide adhesion over entire background/ base and tile backs. - Final appearance: Before bedding material sets, make adjustments necessary to

give true, regular appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final lighting conditions.

- Surplus bedding material: Clean from joints and face of tiles without disturbing tiles.

530 SETTING OUT - Joints: True to line, continuous and without steps. - Joints on walls: Horizontal, vertical and aligned round corners. - Cut tiles: Minimize number, maximize size and locate unobtrusively. 550 FLATNESS/ REGULARITY OF TILING - Sudden irregularities: Not permitted. - Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 2 m straightedge placed

anywhere on surface. The straightedge should not be obstructed by the tiles and no gap should be greater than 3 mm.

Page 36: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/35 specification/preambles

560 LEVEL OF TILING ACROSS JOINTS - Deviation (maximum) between tile surfaces either side of any type of joint: - 1 mm for joints less than 6 mm wide. - 2 mm for joints 6 mm or greater in width. 650 THIN BED ADHESIVE - RIBBED (WALLS) - Application: Apply 3 mm floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of

approximately 1 m². Trowel to ribbed profile. - Tiling: Press tiles firmly onto float coat. 651 THIN BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (WALLS) - Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of about 1

m². Comb surface. - Tiling: Apply thin even coat of adhesive to backs of dry tiles. Press tiles firmly

onto float coat. - Finished adhesive thickness (maximum): 3 mm. MOVEMENT JOINTS/ GROUTING/ COMPLETION 875 GROUTING - Sequence: Grout when bed/adhesive has set sufficiently to prevent disturbance of

tiles. - Joints: 6 mm deep (or depth of tile if less). Free from dust and debris. - Grouting: Fill joints completely, tool to profile, clean off surface. Leave free from

blemishes. - Profile: Flush. - Polishing: When grout is hard, polish tiling with a dry cloth.

Page 37: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/36 specification/preambles

M50 RUBBER/ PLASTICS/ CORK/ LINO/ CARPET TILING/ SHEETING To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TYPES OF COVERING 110 VINYL TILING - Location: Kitchen and bathroom. - Base: Existing screed or T & G boarding. - Preparation: Remove existing floor tiles as clause 470. - Fabricated underlay: Plywood as clause 560. - Tiles: Vinyl. - Manufacturer: Polyflor Limited. Product reference: Classic Mystique PUR. BS EN 685 class: 34 and 43. - Size: 300 x 300mm. - Thickness: 2mm. - Colour(s): Smoke Stone 1160 and Satinwood 1370. - Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): Type to be as

recommended by flooring manufacturer. - Finishing: Clean as clause 820. 158 PVC SHEET FLOORING - Location: Kitchen in sheltered schemes. - Base: Existing screed. - Preparation: Remove existing floor tiles as clause 470. - Flooring roll: PVC to BS EN 13845. - Manufacturer: Polyflor Limited. Product reference: Polysafe Standard PUR. - Width: 2000 mm. - Thickness: 2 mm.

- Colour(s): Autumn Beige 4140 and Ash Grey 4540. - Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): Type to be as

recommended by flooring manufacturer. - Seam welding: Hot welding with matching Polyflor welding rod as clause 682. - Finishing: Clean as clause 830.

Page 38: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/37 specification/preambles

160 PVC SHEET FLOORING IN WET AREAS - Location: Bathrooms with overbath showers. - Base: Existing screed or T & G boarding. - Preparation: Remove existing floor tiles as clause 470. - Fabricated underlay: Plywood as clause 560. - Flooring roll: PVC to BS EN 13845. - Manufacturer: Polyflor Limited. Product reference: Polysafe Hydro. - Width: 2000 mm. - Thickness: 2 mm.

- Colour(s): Oystershell 4800, Blue Forge 4850 and White Stone 4930. - Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): Type to be as

recommended by flooring manufacturer. - Seam welding: Hot welding with matching Polyflor welding rod as clause 682. - Finishing: Clean as clause 830. 162 PVC SHEET FLOORING IN WET AREAS - Location: Bathrooms with overfloor showers. - Base: Existing screed or new screed laid to fall as clause M10/130. - Preparation: Remove existing floor tiles as clause 470. - Fabricated underlay: Plywood as clause 560. - Flooring roll: PVC to BS EN 13845. - Manufacturer: Polyflor Limited. Product reference: Polysafe Hydro. - Width: 2000 mm. - Thickness: 2 mm.

- Colour(s): Oystershell 4800, Blue Forge 4850 and White Stone 4930. - Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): Type to be as

recommended by covering manufacturer. - Seam welding: Hot welding with matching Polyflor welding rod as clause 682. - Accessories: Coved skirting and capping strip as clause 772. - Finishing: Clean as clause 830.

Page 39: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/38 specification/preambles

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 210 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY - Base condition after preparation: Rigid, dry, sound, smooth and free from grease,

dirt and other contaminants. - Finished coverings: Accurately fitted, tightly jointed, securely bonded, smooth

and free from air bubbles, rippling, adhesive marks and stains. 330 COMMENCEMENT - Required condition of works prior to laying materials: - Building is weathertight and well dried out. - Wet trades have finished work. - Paintwork is finished and dry. - Conflicting overhead work is complete. - Floor service outlets, duct covers and other fixtures around which materials are

to be cut are fixed. - Notification: Submit not less than 48 hours before commencing laying. 340 CONDITIONING - Prior to laying: Condition materials by unpacking and separating in spaces where

they are to be laid. Maintain resilient flooring rolls in an upright position. Unroll carpet and keep flat on a supporting surface.

- Conditioning time and temperature (minimum): As recommended by manufacturer with time extended by a factor of two for materials stored or transported at a temperature of less than 10°C immediately prior to laying.

350 ENVIRONMENT - Temperature and humidity: Before, during and after laying, maintain

approximately at levels which will prevail after building is occupied. - Ventilation: Before during and after laying, maintain adequate provision. PREPARING BASES 410 NEW BASES - Suitability of bases and conditions within any area: Commencement of laying of

coverings will be taken as acceptance of suitability. 420 EXISITNG BASES - Notification: Before commencing work, confirm that existing bases will, after

preparation, be suitable to receive coverings. - Suitability of bases and conditions within any area: Commencement of laying of

coverings will be taken as acceptance of suitability. 430 NEW WET LAID BASES - Base drying aids: Not used for at least four days prior to moisture content testing. - Base moisture content test: Carry out in accordance with BS 5325, Annexe A or BS

8203, Annexe A. - Locations for readings: In all corners, along edges, and at various points over

area being tested. - Commencement of laying coverings: Not until all readings show 75% relative

humidity or less.

Page 40: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/39 specification/preambles

440 SUBSTRATES TO RECEIVE THIN COVERINGS - Trowelled finishes: Uniform, smooth surface free from trowel marks and other

blemishes. Abrade suitably to receive specified floor covering material. 460 SMOOTHING/LEVELLING UNDERLAYMENT COMPOUND - Type: Latex cement. - Manufacturer: be as recommended by covering manufacturer. 470 BASES FROM WHICH EXISITING FLOOR COVERINGS HAVE BEEN REMOVED - Substrate: Clear of covering and as much adhesive as possible. Skim with

smoothing underlayment compound to give smooth, even surface. 480 EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGS TO BE OVERLAID - Substrate: Make good by local resticking and patching or filling with smoothing

underlayment compound to give smooth, even surface. 520 TIMBER BOARDING/STRIP FLOORING - Substrate: Boards/ strips securely fixed and acceptably level with no protruding

fasteners. Plane, sand or apply smoothing underlayment compound to give a smooth, even surface.

560 PLYWOOD UNDERLAY - Standard: An approved national standard. - Bonding quality: To BS EN 314-2 class 3. - Appearance: To BS EN 635 class IV. - Finish: Sanded. - Thickness: 6.5mm . - Sheet size: 2400 x 1200mm. - Substrate: Existing floor boards securely fixed and acceptably level with no gross

irregularities or protruding fasteners. - Laying sheets: Stagger cross joints such that no joint within base and underlay is

coincident and with a 0.5-1 mm gap between sheets. - Fasteners: 25 mm ringed shank or twisted shank nails or divergent staples. - Spacing: Commencing at centre of one side of each sheet, at 150 mm grid

centres over area of each sheet and at 100 mm centres along perimeter, set in 12 mm from edge.

- Placement: Driven with heads set flush with surface, and not projecting through underside of base. Not deformed.

Page 41: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/40 specification/preambles

LAYING COVERINGS 610 SETTING OUT TILES - Method: Set out from centre of area/ room so that, wherever possible: - Tiles along opposite edges are of equal size. - Edge tiles are more than 50% of full tile width. 640 ADHESIVE FIXING GENERALLY - Adhesive type: As specified, as recommended by covering/ underlay manufacturer

or as approved. - Primer: Type and usage as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. - Application: As necessary to achieve good bond. - Finished surface: Free from trowel ridges, high spots caused by particles on the

substrate, and other irregularities. 720 DOORWAYS - Joint location: On centre line of door leaf. 775 COVED SKIRTINGS - Cove former: Polyflor ref CF38. Securely bond to base and background. - Flooring: Turn up wall and securely bond to cove former and background, with top

edge straight and parallel with floor. - Height: 100mm. - Corners: Mitre joints. - Top edge: Finished with capping strip SC-N or CT. - Adhesive: Type to be as recommended by covering manufacturer. - Seam welding: Hot welding joints and mitres with matching Polyflor welding rod. 780 TRAFFICKING AFTER LAYING - Covering types: M50/150 free from traffic. - Traffic free period: Until adhesive is set. COMPLETION 820 FINISHING VINYL FLOORING - Cleaning operations: - Wash floor with water containing neutral (pH 6–9) detergent. If necessary,

lightly scrub heavily soiled areas. - Rinse with clean water, removing surplus to prevent damage to adhesive. Allow

to dry. - Emulsion polish: Two coats of a type recommended by covering manufacturer. 830 FINISHING PVC FLOORING - Cleaning operations: - Wash floor with a cleaner recommended by covering manufacturer. - Wet vacuum or mop up residue. - Rinse with clean water. Wet vacuum or mop up and allow to dry.

Page 42: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/41 specification/preambles

M60 PAINTING/ CLEAR FINISHING To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. COATING SYSTEMS 110 MATT EMULSION PAINT TO WALLS - Manufacturer: ICI Paints. - Product reference: Dulux Trade. - Surfaces: All Internal plaster finished masonry and plasterboard and plaster skim

coat finished walls. - Preparation: As clause 400 and 440. - Initial coats: One number thinned coat to paint manufacturer’s recommendations. - Finishing coats: Two full coats. 115 MATT EMULSION PAINT TO CEILINGS - Manufacturer: ICI Paints. - Product reference: Dulux Trade. - Surfaces: All internal plasterboard and plaster skim coat finished ceilings. - Preparation: As clause 400 and 440. - Initial coats: One thinned coat to paint manufacturer’s recommendations. - Finishing coats: Two full coats. 130 GLOSS PAINT TO INTERNAL JOINERY - Manufacturer: ICI Paints. - Product reference: Dulux Trade. - Surfaces: All new internal joinery including windows, doors, door frames/linings,

architraves, skirtings, radiators and associated pipework. - Preparation: As clauses 400. - Initial coats: One coat primer to all new internal joinery before fixing. - Undercoats: One coat. - Finishing coats: One full coat gloss paint, colour white. 135 GLOSS PAINT TO INTERNAL JOINERY - Manufacturer: ICI Paints. - Product reference: Dulux Trade. - Surfaces: All existing internal joinery including windows, doors, door

frames/linings, architraves, skirtings, radiators and associated pipework. - Preparation: As clauses 440. - Initial coats: Spot primer as required. - Undercoats: One coat. - Finishing coats: One full coat gloss paint, colour white. 140 GLOSS PAINT TO INTERNAL METAL WORK - Manufacturer: ICI Paints. - Product reference: Dulux Trade. - Surfaces: All new internal metal work including radiators and associated pipework. - Preparation: As clauses 400. - Initial coats: One coat primer. - Undercoats: One coat. - Finishing coats: One full coat gloss paint, colour white.

Page 43: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/42 specification/preambles

145 GLOSS PAINT TO INTERNAL METAL WORK - Manufacturer: ICI Paints. - Product reference: Dulux Trade. - Surfaces: All existing internal metal work including radiators and associated

pipework. - Preparation: As clauses 440. - Initial coats: Spot primer as required. - Undercoats: One coat. - Finishing coats: One full coat gloss paint, colour white. 160 DECORATIVE WOODSTAIN TO EXTERNAL JOINERY - Manufacturer: ICI Paints. - Product reference: Dulux Trade Weathershield Opaque. - Surfaces: Existing stained window frames. - Preparation: As clause 440. - Finishing coats: One undercoat and one coat finish stain, colour white. 165 DECORATIVE WOODSTAIN TO EXTERNAL JOINERY - Manufacturer: ICI Paints. - Product reference: Cuprinol Trade Cladding and Fence Opaque Finish. - Surfaces: All new external joinery to ramps including posts, rails and handrails. - Preparation: As clause 400. - Finishing coats: Two coats stain. 182 ARTEX FINISH TO CEILINGS - Manufacturer: Artex – Rawplug Limited . - Product reference: Artex Ceiling Finish. - Surfaces: New plasterboard ceilings. - Preparation: As clause 400. Joints to be caulked with Artex Ceiling Finish and

finished with Artex joint tape. - Initial coats: One coat sealer. - Finishing coats: One generous coat of Artex Ceiling Finish to stippled pattern 184 ARTEX FINISH TO CEILINGS - Manufacturer: Artex – Rawplug Limited . - Product reference: Artex Ceiling Finish. - Surfaces: Existing artexed ceilings. - Preparation: Lightly dampen surface and remove any prominent textured nibs. - Initial coats: One coat Artex Stabilex to seal surface. - Finishing coats: One generous coat of Artex Ceiling Finish to cover original

textured surface and finish to stippled pattern.

Page 44: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/43 specification/preambles

GENERAL 215 HANDLING AND STORAGE - Coating materials: Deliver in sealed containers, labelled clearly with brand name,

type of material and manufacturer’s batch number. - Materials from more than one batch: Store separately. Allocate to distinct parts or

areas of the work. 240 SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED - Radiator valves and service valves. 250 SURFACES TO BE CLEANED BUT NOT COATED - Tiled surfaces, glass to windows internally. 280 PROTECTION - ‘Wet paint’ signs and barriers: Provide where necessary to protect other

operatives and general public, and to prevent damage to freshly applied coatings. PREPARATION 400 PREPARATION GENERALLY - Standard: In accordance with BS 6150. - Suspected existing hazardous materials: Prepare risk assessments and method

statements covering operations, disposal of waste, containment, and reoccupation, and obtain approval before commencing work.

- Preparation materials: Types recommended by their manufacturers and the coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared.

- Substrates: Sufficiently dry in depth to suit coating. - Efflorescence salts: Remove. - Dirt, grease and oil: Remove. Give notice if contamination of surfaces/ substrates

has occurred. - Surface irregularities: Remove. - Joints, cracks, holes and other depressions: Fill flush with surface, provide smooth

finish. - Dust, particles and residues from preparation: Remove and dispose of safely. - Water based stoppers and fillers: - Apply before priming unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer. - If applied after priming: Patch prime. - Oil based stoppers and fillers: Apply after priming. - Doors, opening windows and other moving parts: - Ease, if necessary, before coating. - Prime resulting bare areas. 420 FIXTURES AND FITTINGS - Removal: Before commencing work remove: Surface mounted fixtures. - Replacement: Refurbish as necessary, refit when coating is dry. 425 IRONMONGERY - Removal: Before commencing work remove ironmongery from surfaces to be

coated. - Hinges: Do not remove. - Replacement: Refurbish as necessary; refit when coating is dry.

Page 45: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/44 specification/preambles

430 EXISTING IRONMONGERY - Refurbishment: Remove old coating marks. Clean and polish. 440 PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES GENERALLY - Preparation: In accordance with BS 6150, clause 11.5. - Contaminated or hazardous surfaces: Give notice of: - Coatings suspected of containing lead. - Substrates suspected of containing asbestos. - Suspected existing hazardous materials: Prepare risk assessments and method

statements covering operations, disposal of waste, containment, and reoccupation, and obtain approval before commencing work.

- Significant rot, corrosion or other degradation of substrates. - Removing coatings: Do not damage substrate and adjacent surfaces or adversely

affect subsequent coatings. - Loose, flaking or otherwise defective areas: Carefully remove to a firm edge. - Alkali affected coatings: Completely remove. - Retained coatings: - Thoroughly clean to remove dirt, grease and contaminants. - Gloss coated surfaces: Provide key. - Partly removed coatings: - Additional preparatory coats: Apply to restore original coating thicknesses. - Junctions: Provide flush surface. - Completely stripped surfaces: Prepare as for uncoated surfaces. 456 PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES - BURNING OFF - Risk assessment and method statement: Prepare, and obtain approval before

commencing work. - Adjacent areas: Protect from excessive heat and falling scrapings. - Exposed resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting. - Removed coatings: Dispose of safely. 461 PREVIOUSLY COATED WOOD - Degraded or weathered surface wood: Take back to provide suitable substrate. - Degraded substrate wood: Repair with sound material of same species. - Exposed resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting. 471 PREPRIMED WOOD - Areas of defective primer: Take back to barewood and reprime. 481 UNCOATED WOOD - General: Provide smooth, even finish with arrises and moulding edges lightly

rounded or eased. - Heads of fasteners: Countersink sufficient to hold stoppers/ fillers. - Resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting. 490 PREVIOUSLY COATED STEEL - Defective paintwork: Remove to leave a firm edge and clean bright metal. - Sound paintwork: Provide key for subsequent coats. - Corrosion and loose scale: Take back to bare metal. - Residual rust: Treat with a proprietary removal solution. - Bare metal: Apply primer as soon as possible. - Remaining areas: Degrease.

Page 46: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/45 specification/preambles

500 PREPRIMED STEEL - Areas of defective primer, corrosion and loose scale: Take back to bare metal.

Reprime as soon as possible. 511 GALVANIZED, SHERARDIZED AND ELECTROPLATED STEEL - White rust: Remove. - Pretreatment: Apply one of the following: - ‘T wash’/ mordant solution to blacken whole surface. - Etching primer recommended by coating system manufacturer. 521 UNCOATED STEEL - MANUAL CLEANING - Oil and grease: Remove. - Corrosion, loose scale, welding slag and spatter: Remove. - Residual rust: Treat with a proprietary removal solution. - Primer: Apply as soon as possible. 541 UNCOATED ALUMINIUM/ COPPER/ LEAD - Surface corrosion: Remove, and lightly key surface. - Pretreatment: Etching primer, if recommended by coating system manufacturer. 552 UNCOATED PVC-U - Dirt and grease: Remove. Do not abrade surface. 570 UNCOATED MASONRY/ RENDERING - Loose and flaking material: remove. 580 UNCOATED PLASTER - Nibs, trowel marks and plaster splashes: Scrape off. - Overtrowelled ‘polished’ areas: Key lightly. 590 UNCOATED PLASTERBOARD - Depressions around fixings: Fill with stopper/filler. 601 UNCOATED PLASTERBOARD - TO RECEIVE TEXTURED COATING - Joints: Fill, tape and feather out with materials recommended by textured coating

manufacturer. 611 WALL COVERINGS - Retained wall coverings: Check that they are in good condition and well adhered

to substrate. - Previously covered walls: Wash down to remove paper residues, adhesive and size. 622 ORGANIC GROWTHS - Dead and loose growths and infected coatings: Scrape off and remove from site. - Treatment biocide: Apply appropriate solution to growth areas and surrounding

surfaces. - Residual effect biocide: Apply appropriate solution to inhibit re-establishment of

growths.

Page 47: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/46 specification/preambles

631 PREVIOUSLY PAINTED WINDOW FRAMES - Paint encroaching beyond glass sight line: Remove. - Loose and defective putty: Remove. - Putty cavities and junctions between previously painted surfaces and glass: Clean

thoroughly. - Finishing: - Patch prime, reputty as necessary, and allow to harden. - Seal and coat as soon as sufficiently hard. APPLICATION 711 COATING GENERALLY - Application: In accordance with BS 6150, clause 9. - Conditions: Maintain suitable temperature, humidity and air quality during

application and drying. - Surfaces: Clean and dry at time of application. - Thinning and intermixing of coatings: Not permitted unless recommended by

manufacturer. - Overpainting: Do not paint over intumescent strips or silicone mastics. - Priming coats: - Thickness: To suit surface porosity. - Application: As soon as possible on same day as preparation is completed. - Finish: - Even, smooth and of uniform colour. - Free from brush marks, sags, runs and other defects. - Cut in neatly. - Doors, opening windows and other moving parts: Ease before coating and between

coats. 751 STAINING WOOD - Primer: Apply, if recommended by stain manufacturer. - Application: Apply in flowing coats and brush out excess stain to produce uniform

appearance. 770 EXTERNAL DOORS - Bottom edges: Prime and coat before hanging doors. 780 BEAD GLAZING TO COATED WOOD - Before glazing: Apply first two coats to rebates and beads. 790 PUTTY GLAZING - Setting: Allow putty to set for seven days. - Sealing: - Within a further 14 days, seal with an oil based primer. - Fully protect putty with coating system as soon as it is sufficiently hard. - Extend finishing coats on to glass up to sight line.

Page 48: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/47 specification/preambles

N10 GENERAL FIXTURES/ FURNISHINGS/ EQUIPMENT To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. PRODUCTS 150 FITTED KITCHEN UNITS - Standard: To BS 6222, BS EN 1153 and BS EN 14749 as appropriate. - Manufacturer: Rixonway Kitchens Ltd. - Product reference: Trieste range, 18mm carcases. - Structural performance: To BS 6222-2, grade H. - Dimensions: To BS EN 1116. - Surface finishes: To BS 6222-3. - Doors/ Drawer fronts: - Finish/ Colour: Beech, Elements, Gloss White, Maple, Rosewood and Walnut. - Side panels/ Plinths/ Shelves: - Finish/Colour: As door/draw fronts. - Shelves: - Finish/Colour: White. - Worktops: - Classification: To BS 6222-3, type: 2. - Material: 40mm thick x 600mm deep Coreboard. - Finish/ Colour: Aticos Gold, Aztec Granite, Beech Butchers Block, Beige Granite, Clear Maple,

Dakota, Maryland Clair Grey and Maryland Fonce Slate. - Accessories: - 40mm corner joints - 40mm end caps - Jointing trims, colour: matt chrome - matt deco bow handles - traditional pelmet to wall units, colour to match door/draw fronts. - under wall unit luminaires as clause V90/500 - Sinktop: 950 x 508mm single bowl sink inset, left / right. - Taps: Bristan Alterna deck sink mixer ref VALDSMCCD, chromium plated finish. - Waste and trap: Combination sink waste with flexible overflow pipe, tubular P

trap with tee off for washing machine connection, plug and chain. EXECUTION 710 MOISTURE CONTENT OF WOOD AND WOOD BASED BOARDS - Temperature and humidity: During delivery, storage, fixing and to handover

maintain conditions to suit specified moisture contents of timber components. - Testing: When instructed, test components with approved moisture meter to

manufacturer's recommendations. 720 INSTALLATION GENERALLY

- Fixing and fasteners: As section Z20.

Page 49: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/48 specification/preambles

740 TAPS - Fixing: Secure, watertight seal with the appliance. - Positioning: Hot tap to left of cold tap as viewed by the user of the appliance. - Flow limiters: Bristan ECO TAP 6 colour black, fitted to cold tap tails only. 750 WASTES/ OVERFLOWS - Bedding: Waterproof jointing compound. - Fixing: With resilient washer between appliance and backnut. 765 SEALANT POINTING - Material: Silicone based to BS 5889, Type B with fungicide. - Colour: White. - Manufacturer: Adshead Ratcliffe. - Product reference: Arbosil 1081. - Application: As section Z22. 770 TRIMS - Lengths: Wherever possible, unjointed between angles or ends of runs. - Running joints: Where unavoidable, obtain approval of location and method of

jointing. - Angle joints: Mitred. COMPLETION 910 GENERAL - Doors and drawers: Accurately aligned, not binding. Adjusted to ensure smooth

operation. - Ironmongery: Checked, adjusted and lubricated to ensure correct functioning. 920 APPLIANCES - Test: Run for a full cycle, ensure that all functions and features work correctly. - Documentation: Submit guarantees, instruction manuals etc.

Page 50: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/49 specification/preambles

N13 SANITARY APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions. TYPES OF APPLIANCE/ FITTING 300 WCS AND CISTERNS - Standard: To DEFRA WC suite performance specification or approved by relevant

water company. - Type: Floor mounted washdown pan with low level cistern. - Pan: - Manufacturer: Twyford. Product reference: Classic ref CC1138WH. - Sealing: Pan to floor as clause 755. - Seat and cover: - Manufacturer: Twyford. Product reference: Advent ref AD7810WH. - Pan connector: - Standard: To BS 5627. - Manufacturer: Twyford. Product reference: WC outlet connector. - Colour: White, to match pan. - Cistern: - Manufacturer: Twyford. Product reference: Classic ref CC2641WH. - Colour and finish (exposed cisterns): White, to match pan. - Flush volume: 6 litres single flush. 305 WCS AND CISTERNS - Standard: To DEFRA WC suite performance specification or approved by relevant

water company. - Type: Closed coupled suit. - Pan: - Manufacturer: Twyford. Product reference: Galerie Optimise ref GP1148WH. - Sealing: Pan to floor as clause 755. - Seat and cover: - Manufacturer: Twyford. Product reference: Galerie Optimise ref GP7815WH. - Pan connector: - Standard: To BS 5627. - Manufacturer: Twyford. Product reference: WC outlet connector. - Colour: White, to match pan. - Cistern: - Manufacturer: Twyford. Product reference: Galerie Optimise ref GP2496WH. - Colour and finish (exposed cisterns): White, to match pan. - Flush volume: 6/4 litres dual flush.

Page 51: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/50 specification/preambles

335 WASH BASINS - BATHROOM - Manufacturer: Twyford. - Product reference: Classic ref CC4212WH. - Size: 560 x 415mm. - Material: Vitreous china, white. - Tap/Chainstay/Overflow holes: Waste chain and plug. - Water supply fittings: - Manufacturer: Bristan. Product reference: ½” Alterna basin tap ref TRDCLBSN, chromium plated finish. - Wastes: Grated, chromium plated finish. - Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3. - Size: DN32. - Material: Copper alloy. - Tail: Slotted. - Traps: Tubular, P type. - Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3. - Size: DN32. - Material: Plastics, self coloured white. - Depth of seal (minimum): 75 mm. - Accessories: Pedestal ref VC5910WH,. - Sealing: Between basin and tiled splashback as clause 755. 340 WASH BASINS - WC/CLOAK ROOM - Manufacturer: Twyford. - Product reference: Anglo 495 ref WB1912WH. - Size: 495 x 420mm. - Material: Vitreous china, white. - Water supply fittings: - Manufacturer: Bristan. Product reference: ½” Alterna basin tap ref TRDCLBSN, chromium plated finish. - Wastes: Grated, chromium plated finish. - Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3. - Size: DN32. - Material: Copper alloy. - Tail: Slotted. - Traps: Tubular, P type. - Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3. - Size: DN32. - Material: Plastics, self coloured white. - Depth of seal (minimum): 75 mm. - Accessories: Wall hangers ref SR5307XX. - Sealing: Between basin and tiled splashback as clause 755.

Page 52: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/51 specification/preambles

345 WASH BASINS - WC/CLOAK ROOM - Manufacturer: Ideal Standard. - Product reference: Studio 35 ref E1170. - Size: 350 x 250mm. - Material: Vitreous china, white. - Tap/Chainstay/Overflow holes: Waste chain and plug. - Water supply fittings: - Manufacturer: Bristan. Product reference: ½” Alterna basin tap ref TRDCLBSN, chromium plated finish. - Wastes: Grated, chromium plated finish. - Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3. - Size: DN32. - Material: Copper alloy. - Tail: Slotted. - Traps: Tubular, P type. - Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3. - Size: DN32. - Material: Plastics, self coloured white. - Depth of seal (minimum): 75 mm. - Accessories: Concealed wall hangers ref E5010. - Sealing: Between basin and tiled splashback as clause 755. 355 BATHS - Standard: BS 1390. - Manufacturer: Twyford. - Product reference: Celtic with two tap holes, hand grips and slip resistant

finish. - Size: 1500, 1600 and 1700 long x 700mm wide. - Material: Pressed steel enamelled white. - Tap/Chainstay/Overflow holes: Two tap holes, overflow outlet, waste chain and

plug. - Water supply fittings: - Manufacturer: Bristan. Product reference: ¾ “ Alterna bath tap ref VAL3/4CCD, chromium plated

finish. - Wastes: Grated, chromium plated finish. - Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3. - Size: DN 40. - Material: Copper alloy. - Tail: Unslotted. - Traps: Tubular, low line type with flexible overflow pipe. - Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3. - Size: DN 40. - Material: Plastics, self coloured white. - Depth of seal (minimum): 50 mm. - Accessories: Moulded white acrylic bath/end panel (Cavilier College) fixed with

sherardized steel screws with white snap and cover caps on 50 x 50mm sawn softwood wall/floor battens.

- Sealing: Between bath and tiled splashback as clause 755. - Enclosure: Curtains as clause 500.

- Shower fittings: As clause S90/355.

Page 53: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/52 specification/preambles

375 SHOWER UNITS - Tray: - Manufacturer: AKW Medi-Care Limited. Product reference: Tuff Form. - Size: To suit installation. - Material: Compressed GRP. - Wastes/trap: - Manufacturer: AKW Medi-Care Limited. Product reference: GW50 gravity waste with TFWA Tuff Form waste adaptor. - Size: DN 50. - Enclosure: Curtains as clause 500.

- Shower fittings: As clause S90/350 or 354. 500 SHOWER TRACK AND CURTAINS - Track: - Manufacturer: Contour Showers Limited. - Product reference: Flexitrack ref 02FLEX2000. - Size: 2500mm straight and 1800mm curved. - Accessories: Ceiling drop rod and end brackets. - Curtains: - Product reference: Unspecified supply. - Size: 1800 x 1800mm and 1800 x 2200mm. - Material: 4oz plain white polyester with weighted hem. - Accessories: Curtain hooks. EXECUTION 610 INSTALLATION GENERALLY - Assembly and fixing: Surfaces designed to falls to drain as intended. - Fasteners: Nonferrous or stainless steel. - Supply and discharge pipework: Fix before appliances. - Fixing: Fix appliances securely to structure. Do not support on pipework. - Jointing and bedding compounds: Recommended by manufacturers of appliances,

accessories and pipes being jointed or bedded. - Appliances: Do not use. Do not stand on appliances. - On completion: Components and accessories working correctly with no leaks. - Labels and stickers: Removed. 620 NOGGINGS AND BEARERS - Noggings, bearers, etc. to support sanitary appliances and fittings: Position

accurately. Fix securely. 630 TILED BACKGROUNDS OTHER THAN SPLASHBACKS - Timing: Complete before fixing appliances. - Fixing appliances: Do not overstress tiles. 670 INSTALLING CISTERNS - Cistern operating components: Obtain from cistern manufacturer. - Float operated valve: Matched to pressure of water supply. - Overflow pipe: Fixed to falls and located to give visible warning of discharge. - Location: Agreed, where not shown on drawings.

Page 54: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/53 specification/preambles

710 INSTALLING TAPS - Fixing: Secure against twisting. - Seal with appliance: Watertight. - Positioning: Hot tap to left of cold tap as viewed by user of appliance. - Flow limiters: Bristan ECO TAP 6 colour black, fitted to basin cold tap tails only. 720 INSTALLING WASTES AND OVERFLOWS - Bedding: Waterproof jointing compound. - Fixing: With resilient washer between appliance and backnut. 755 SEALANT POINTING - Material: Silicone based to BS 5889, Type B with fungicide. - Colour: White. - Manufacturer: Adshead Ratcliffe. - Product reference: Arbosil 1081. - Application: As section Z22.

Page 55: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/54 specification/preambles

P10 SUNDRY INSULATION/ PROOFING WORK To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. 125 INSULATION LAID BETWEEN CEILING TIES/ JOISTS - Material: Mineral wool. - Standard: BS EN 13162. - Manufacturer: Rockwool Limited. - Product reference: Rockwool Roll. - Thickness: 125mm. - Installation requirements: - Installation standard: BS 5803-5. - Joints: Butted, no gaps. - Insulation at perimeter: Carried over wall plates. - Service holes: Sealed, and debris removed before laying insulation. - Eaves ventilation: Unobstructed. - Water cistern platforms: No insulation underneath. 135 INSULATION LAID ACROSS CEILING TIES/ JOISTS - Material: Mineral wool. - Standard: BS EN 13162. - Manufacturer: Rockwool Limited. - Product reference: Rockwool Roll. - Thickness: 300mm (2No layers of 150mm cross laid). - Installation requirements: - Installation standard: BS 5803-5. - Insulation widths: Widest practical. - Laid direction: At right angles to ties/ joists. - Joints: Butted, no gaps. - Insulation: Fitted neatly around rafter ends and extended over wall plates. - Service holes: Sealed, debris removed before laying insulation. - Eaves ventilation: Unobstructed. - Water cistern platforms: No insulation underneath.

Page 56: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/55 specification/preambles

P20 Unframed isolated trims/skirtings/sundry items To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. 100 SOFTWOOD DOOR LININGS: - Quality of timber and fixing: To BS 1186-3. - Species: Softwood to contractor’s choice. - Class: 3 for gloss paint finishing. - Moisture content at time of fixing: 6 to 10%. - Profile: Square edged. - Finished size: - New door openings in existing masonry walls: 32mm thick with depth to

suit existing wall. - New timber stud walling: 128 x 32mm - Finish as delivered: Prepared and primed as section M60. - Fixing: - New door openings in existing masonry walls: Stainless steel countersunk plug

and screw fixed to existing masonry reveal at 300mm maximum centres. - New timber stud walling: Stainless steel countersunk screw fixed to timber

structure/reveal at 300mm maximum centres. 102 SOFTWOOD PLANTED STOPS - Quality of timber and fixing: To BS 1186-3. - Species: Softwood to contractor’s choice. - Class: 3 for gloss paint finishing. - Moisture content at time of fixing: 6 to 10%. - Profile: Square edged. - Finished size: 12 x 38mm and 25 x 50mm. - Finish as delivered: Prepared and primed as section M60. - Fixing: Concealed head nail fixed at 300mm maximum centres. 105 SOFTWOOD ARCHITRAVES: - Quality of timber and fixing: To BS 1186-3. - Species: Softwood to contractor’s choice. - Class: 3 for gloss paint finishing. - Moisture content at time of fixing: 6 to 10%. - Profile: To match existing - Finished size: To match existing - Finish as delivered: Prepared and primed as section M60. - Fixing: Concealed head nail fixed at 300mm maximum centres. 110 SOFTWOOD SKIRTINGS - Quality of timber and fixing: To BS 1186-3. - Species: Softwood to contractor’s choice. - Class: 3 for gloss paint finishing. - Moisture content at time of fixing: 6 to 10%. - Profile: To match existing. - Finished size: To match existing. - Finish as delivered: Prepared and primed as section M60. - Fixing: Concealed head masonry nail fixed at 300mm maximum centres.

Page 57: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/56 specification/preambles

120 SOFTWOOD PDSTS - Quality of timber and fixing: To BS 1186-3. - Species: Softwood to contractor’s choice. - Class: 3 for stain finishing. - Moisture content at time of fixing: 9 to 13%. - Preservative treatment: Vacuum or pressure impregnated. - Profile: Square edged. - Finished size: 69 x 69mm. - Finish as delivered: Natural. - Fixing: Forming 450 x 300 x 450mm deep post hole and bacfilling to not less than

three quarters of the depth with concrete. 122 SOFTWOOD RAILS - Quality of timber and fixing: To BS 1186-3. - Species: Softwood to contractor’s choice. - Class: 3 for stain finishing. - Moisture content at time of fixing: 9 to 13%. - Preservative treatment: Vacuum or pressure impregnated. - Profile: Square edged. - Finished size: 25 x 94mm. - Finish as delivered: Natural. - Fixing: Screwed with 75mm x No 10 woodscrews at 1500mm centres. 125 SOFTWOOD HANDRAILS - Quality of timber and fixing: To BS 1186-3. - Species: Softwood to contractor’s choice. - Class: 3 for stain finishing. - Moisture content at time of fixing: 9 to 13%. - Preservative treatment: Vacuum or pressure impregnated. - Profile: Mopstick. - Finished size: 44 x 69mm. - Finish as delivered: Natural. - Fixing: Screwed with 38mm x No 10 woodscrews. 140 HARDWOOD THRESHOLD - Quality of wood and fixing: To BS 1186-3. - Species: Sapele. - Class: 1. - Moisture content at time of fixing: 6 to 10%. - Profile: Square edged. - Finished size: 19 x 127mm. - Finish as delivered: Natural. - Fixing: Plugged, screwed and pellated with 38mm x No 10 woodscrews at 600mm

centres. 150 METAL THRESHOLD - Material: Alumium. - Finished size: 127mm wide. - Finish: Fluted/grooved finish to top surface. - Fixing: Plugged and screwed with 38mm x No 10 woodscrews at 600mm centres. - Metalwork: As section Z11.

Page 58: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/57 specification/preambles

240 PLYWOOD INFILL PANEL ABOVE DOOR - Thickness: 9mm. - Face ply species: Contractor’s choice. - Appearance class to BS EN 635: 1/11. - Bond quality to BS EN 314-2: Class 1. - Support/Fixing: 12 x 38mm softwood beads each side as clause 102. 380 WINDOW BOARD - Manufacturer: Swish Building Products. - Product reference: Cappit window board ref C120. - Thickness: 9mm. - Size: 225mm wide, reduced in size to suit width of reveal. - Fixing: Adhesive. - Sealing: All edges of board and between tiled splashback as clause 525. 405 POST SUPPORTS FOR SOFTWOOD RAILS - Manufacturer: Kee Klamp Limited. - Type/Size: 48.3mm diameter hollow steel tubing. - Finish/Colour: Galvanised. - Fittings: Fixing plate ref 70-8 and swivel flange ref C58-8. - Fixing: Forming 350 x 200 x 600mm deep post hole and bacfilling to not less than

three quarters of the depth with concrete. 510 INSTALLATION GENERALLY - Joinery workmanship: As section Z10. - Metal workmanship: As section Z11. - Methods of fixing and fasteners: As section Z20 where not specified. - Straight runs: To be in one piece, or in long lengths with as few joints as possible. - Running joints: Location and method of forming to be agreed where not detailed. - Joints at angles: Mitred unless indicated otherwise. - Position and level: To be agreed where not detailed. 525 SEALANT POINTING - Material: Silicone based to BS 5889, Type B with fungicide. - Colour: White. - Manufacturer: Adshead Ratcliffe. - Product reference: Arbosil 1081. - Application: As section Z22.

Page 59: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/58 specification/preambles

P21 DOOR/ WINDOW IRONMONGERY To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. GENERAL 121 IRONMONGERY FROM SINGLE PROPRIETARY RANGE - Manufacturer: Contractors choice. - Product reference: Inform CA of selected supplier and range. - Principal material/finish: SAA. - Items unavailable within selected range: Submit proposals. 140 SAMPLES - General: Before placing orders with suppliers submit labelled samples of the

following: Internal lever door furniture. - Conformity: Retain samples on site for the duration of the contract. Ensure

conformity of ironmongery as delivered with labelled samples. 180 CATEGORY OF DUTY FOR DOOR IRONMONGERY - Standard: To DD 171. - Category of duty of doors: Medium duty. - General: Durability of ironmongery components to be compatible with stated

category of duty of each door leaf. - Exclusions: Ironmongery with specific duty or 'category of use' defined

elsewhere. - Documentation: Before placing orders with suppliers submit documentation

showing product compliance with stated category of duty. DOOR HANGING DEVICES 320 DOOR HINGES - Manufacturer: As clause 121. - Product reference: Contractors choice. - Type: Butt. - Size: 75 x 49mm. - Material/finish: Steel, light duty. - Other requirements: One pair per door. 350 DOOR TRACK AND RUNNING GEAR - Standard: To BS EN 1527. - Manufacturer: PC Henderson Limited. - Product reference: Marathon 55. - Track type: Galvanised steel top track, integral hangers with nylon wheels. - Category of door: Straight sliding. - Opening dimensions: To suit requirements. - Accessories: Pelmet, end caps and draught proofing. - Operation: Smooth and quiet. - Safety: Doors not able to come off track when in use.

Page 60: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/59 specification/preambles

DOOR FURNITURE 610 LEVER HANDLES - Standard: To BS EN 1906. - Manufacturer: As clause 121. - Product reference: Contractors choice. - Style: Rectangular back plate. - Size: To match existing. - Material/ finish: SAA. - Mounting: Screw fixed plate with fixed spindle. 641 PULL HANDLES - Manufacturer: As clause 121. - Product reference: Contractors choice. - Standard: To BS 8424. - Shape: D. - Diameter: 20mm. - Distance between centres: 225mm. - Material/ finish: SAA. - Mounting: Screw fixed, concealed fixing with rose. 645 INSET PULL HANDLES - Manufacturer: As clause 121. - Product reference: Contractors choice. - Size: 100 x 50mm. - Material/finish: SAA. - Mounting: Screw fixed.

Page 61: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/60 specification/preambles

P31 HOLES, CHASES, COVERS AND SUPPORTS FOR SERVICES To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. EXECUTION 620 HOLES AND CHASES IN IN SITU CONCRETE - Cast in: Holes larger than 10 mm diameter and chases. - Cutting and drilling: - Permitted for holes not larger than 10 mm diameter. 650 HOLES, RECESSES AND CHASES IN MASONRY - Locations: To maintain integrity of strength, stability and sound resistance of

construction. - Sizes: Minimum needed to accommodate services. - Holes (maximum): 300 x 300 mm. - Walls of hollow or cellular blocks: Do not chase. - Walls of other materials: - Vertical chases: No deeper than one third of single leaf thickness, excluding

finishes. - Horizontal or raking chases: No longer than 1 m. No deeper than one sixth of

the single leaf thickness, excluding finishes. - Chases and recesses: Do not set back to back. Offset by a clear distance at least

equal to the wall thickness. - Cutting: Do not cut until mortar is fully set. Cut carefully and neatly. Avoid

spalling, cracking and other damage to surrounding structure. 670 NOTCHES AND HOLES IN STRUCTURAL TIMBER - General: Avoid if possible. - Sizes: Minimum needed to accommodate services. - Position: Do not locate near knots or other defects. - Notches and holes in same joist: Minimum 100 mm apart horizontally. - Notches in joists: Locate at top. Form by sawing down to a drilled hole. - Depth (maximum): 0.125 x joist depth. - Distance from supports: Between 0.07 and 0.25 x span. - Holes in joists: Locate on neutral axis. - Diameter (maximum): 0.25 x joist depth. - Centres (minimum): 3 x diameter of largest hole. - Distance from supports: Between 0.25 and 0.4 of span. - Notches in roof rafters, struts and truss members: Not permitted. - Holes in struts and columns: Locate on neutral axis. - Diameter (maximum): 0.25 x minimum width of member. - Centres (minimum): 3 x diameter of largest hole. - Distance from ends: Between 0.25 and 0.4 of span.

Page 62: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/61 specification/preambles

Q20 GRANULAR SUB-BASES TO ROADS/ PAVINGS To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. 140 EXCAVATION OF SUBGRADES - Final excavation to formation/subformation level: Carry out immediately before

compaction of subgrade. - Wet conditions: Do not excavate or compact when the subgrade may be damaged

or destabilized. 145 PREPARATION AND COMPACTION OF SUBGRADES - Timing: Immediately before placing sub-base. - Compaction: Thoroughly, by roller or other suitable means, adequate to resist

subsidence or deformation of the subgrade during construction and of the completed roads/ pavings when in use. Take particular care to compact fully at intrusions, perimeters and where local excavation and backfilling has taken place.

211 GRANULAR MATERIAL - Quality: Free from excessive dust, well graded, all pieces less than 75 mm in any

direction, minimum 10% fines value of 50 kN when tested in a soaked condition to BS 812-111 and BS EN 1097-2, and in any one layer only one of the following:

- Crushed rock (other than argillaceous rock) or quarry waste with not more binding material than is required to help hold the stone together.

- Crushed concrete, crushed brick or tile, free from plaster, timber and metal. - Gravel or hoggin with not more clay content than is required to bind the

material together, and with no large lumps of clay. - Natural gravel. - Natural sand. - Filling: Spread and levelled in 150 mm maximum layers, each layer thoroughly

compacted. 230 PLACING GRANULAR MATERIAL GENERALLY - Preparation: Loose soil, rubbish and standing water removed. - Structures, membranes and buried services: Ensure stability and avoid damage. 250 LAYING GRANULAR SUB-BASES - General: Spread and levelled. - Compaction: - Timing: As soon as possible after laying. - Method: By roller or other suitable means, adequate to resist subsidence or

deformation of the sub-base during construction and of the completed paving when in use. Take particular care to compact fully at intrusions, perimeters and where local excavation and backfilling has taken place.

Page 63: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/62 specification/preambles

320 BLINDING - Material: Sand, fine gravel or PFA. - Finish: Close, smooth, compacted surface. 330 COLD WEATHER WORKING - Frozen materials: Do not use. - Freezing conditions: Do not place fill on frozen surfaces. Remove material

affected by frost. Replace and recompact if not damaged after thawing. 340 PROTECTION - Sub-bases: As soon as practicable, cover with subsequent layers, specified

elsewhere. - Subgrades and sub-bases: Prevent degradation by construction traffic,

construction operations and inclement weather.

Page 64: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/63 specification/preambles

Q21 IN SITU CONCRETE ROADS/ PAVINGS/ BASES To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TYPES OF PAVING 110 UNREINFORCED PAVING/RAMP (DESIGNATED CONCRETE) - Granular sub-base: As clause Q20/211. - Thickness (minimum): 150mm. - Concrete: To BS 8500-2. - Designation: PAV1. - Aggregate: Size (maximum): 20mm. Coarse recycled concrete aggregate: Not permitted. - Consistence class: S2. - Slab thickness (minimum): 100mm. - Finish: Tamped. GENERAL/ PREPARATION 140 READY-MIXED CONCRETE - Production plant: Currently certified by a body accredited by UKAS to BS EN 45011

for product conformity certification of ready-mixed concrete. - Source of ready-mixed concrete: Obtain from one source if possible. Otherwise,

submit proposals. - Name and address of depot: Submit before any concrete is delivered. - Delivery notes: Retain for inspection. - Declarations of nonconformity from concrete producer: Notify immediately. 240 SUB-BASE PREPARATION - Surface: Sound, free of debris, mud and soft spots, and suitably close textured. - Levels and falls: Within specified tolerances: - Pedestrian areas: ±12 mm. - Kerbs and edgings: Complete, adequately bedded and haunched, and to required

levels. LAYING CONCRETE 310 TRANSPORTING CONCRETE - General: Avoid contamination, segregation, loss of ingredients, excessive

evaporation and loss of workability. Protect from heavy rain. - Entrained air: Anticipate effects of transport and placing methods in order to

achieve specified air content. - Placing: Use suitable walkways and barrow runs for traffic over reinforcement and

freshly placed concrete.

Page 65: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/64 specification/preambles

320 LAYING CONCRETE GENERALLY - Timing: Place as soon as practicable after mixing and while sufficiently plastic for

full compaction. After discharge from the mixer do not add water or retemper. - Temperature of concrete at point of delivery: - In hot weather (maximum): 30°C. - In cold weather (minimum): 5°C. - Cold weather: - Do not use frozen materials. - Do not place concrete against frozen or frost covered surfaces. - Do not place concrete when air temperature is below 3°C on a falling

thermometer. Do not resume placing until rising air temperature has reached 3°C.

- Surfaces on which concrete is to be placed: Free from debris and standing water. - Placing in final position: Place in one continuous operation up to construction

joints. - Do not place concrete simultaneously on both sides of movement joints. - Spreading: Spread and strike off with surcharge sufficient to obtain required

compacted thickness. - Adjacent work: Form neat junctions and prevent damage. Keep clean all channels,

kerbs, inspection covers, etc. 330 COMPACTING - General: Fully compact concrete to full depth (until air bubbles cease to appear

on the surface) especially around reinforcement, cast-in accessories, into corners and at joints.

- Poker vibrators: Do not use to make concrete flow into position. Do not allow to come into contact with fabric reinforcement.

- Wet formed joint grooves: Rectify any irregularities by means of a vibrating float. - Finish: A dense, even textured surface free from laitance or excessive water. - Excess concrete: Remove from top of groove formers. 350 LEVELS - Lines and levels of finished surface: Smooth and even, with regular falls to

prevent ponding. - Finished surfaces: Within ±6 mm of required levels (+6 or -0 mm adjacent to

gullies and manholes). 360 SURFACE REGULARITY - General: Where appropriate in relation to the geometry of the surface, the

variation in gap under a 3 m straightedge (with feet) placed anywhere on the surface to be not more than 5 mm.

- Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.

Page 66: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/65 specification/preambles

JOINTS 410 JOINTS GENERALLY - Layout: All joints to be accurately located, straight and well aligned. - Construction joints made at end of working day: Form as contraction joints. - Modifications to joint design or location: Submit proposals. - Temporary support: Prior to concreting, set formwork, dowel bars, tie bars, joint

filler boards, sealing groove fillets and the like rigidly in position and support to prevent displacement. Maintain support until concrete has set.

- Keep clean: - Do not allow concrete to enter any gaps or voids in formwork or to render

movement joints ineffective. - Do not allow concrete to impregnate or penetrate materials used as

compressible joint fillers. 470 EXPANSION JOINTS - Joint filler board: - Type: Flexcell. - Thickness: 10mm. - Depth: 150-300mm. SURFACE FINISH 520 TAMPED FINISH - Method: Tamp surface with edge of a board or beam to give an even texture of

parallel ribs. 530 BRUSHED FINISH - Direction: At right angles to longitudinal direction of the slab. - Texture depth: Approximately 1 mm with finished surface having an overall even

texture. CURING/ PROTECTION/ FINISHING 610 CURING - General: Immediately after completion of surface treatment prevent evaporation

from surface and exposed edges of slabs for a minimum period of seven days. - Early curing: - Cover with waterproof sheeting held clear of surface. Seal against draughts at

edges and junctions. - Do not apply sprayed compounds or sheets in direct contact until surface is in a

suitable state and will not be marked. - Coverings for curing: Contractor's choice of: - Impervious sheet material. - Resin based aluminized curing compound containing a fugitive dye and with an

efficiency index of 90% when tested to BS 7542. - Sprayed plastics film.

Page 67: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/66 specification/preambles

660 PROTECTION - Prevent damage to concrete: - From rain, indentation, physical damage, dirt, staining, rust marks and other

disfiguration. - From thermal shock. - In cold weather, from freezing expansion of water trapped in pockets, etc. - By use as a building platform or for storing, mixing or preparing materials.

Page 68: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/67 specification/preambles

R11 ABOVE GROUND FOUL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 210 DESIGN - Design: Modify and/or extend above ground foul drainage system to installed

appliances. 220 COLLECTION AND DISTRIBUTION OF FOUL WATER - General: Quick, quiet and complete, self-cleansing in normal use, without

blockage, crossflow, backfall, leakage, odours, noise nuisance or risk to health. - Pressure fluctuations in pipework (maximum): ±38 mm water gauge. - Water seal retained in traps (minimum): 25 mm. PRODUCTS 350 MUPVC OR PVC-C PIPEWORK FOR WASTES - Material and standard: - MUPVC: To BS 5255 and Kitemark certified; or - PVC-C: To BS EN 1566-1, and Kitemark certified. Application area code: B. Opening dimensions of access fittings, design of swept fittings, stand off

dimensions of pipe and fitting brackets and requirements for adaptors and plugs: To BS 4514.

- Manufacturer: Gerberit Terrain. - Product reference: Soil and waste System. - Nominal sizes: DN 32 and DN40. - Colour: - External exposed pipework: Grey. - Internal pipework: White. - Brackets: - Fixings: Plastics pipe clips to match pipe colour fixed in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations. 365 PVC-U PIPEWORK FOR SOIL AND VENT PIPES

- Standard: To BS EN 1329-1, Kitemark certified. - Weather resistance, connectors to WC pans, opening dimensions of access

fittings, design of swept fittings, stand off dimensions of pipe and fitting brackets and requirements for adaptors and plugs: To BS 4514.

- Manufacturer: Gerberit Terrain. - Product reference: Soil and waste System. - Nominal size: DN 110. - Colour: Grey. - Brackets: - Fixings: Plastics pipe clips to match pipe colour fixed in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations. - Accessories: - Vent cowl and weathering collar. - Lead slate as clause H71/480.

Page 69: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/68 specification/preambles

EXECUTION 601 INSTALLATION GENERALLY - Standard: To BS EN 12056-5. - Components: From the same manufacturer for each type of pipework. - Electrolytic corrosion: Avoid contact between dissimilar metals where corrosion

may occur. - Plastics and galvanized steel pipes: Do not bend. - Allowance for thermal and building movement: Provide and maintain clearance as

fixing and jointing proceeds. - Concealed or inaccessible surfaces: Decorate before starting work specified in this

section. - Protection: - Purpose made temporary caps: Fit to prevent ingress of debris. - Access covers, cleaning eyes and blanking plates: Fit as the work proceeds. 605 PIPE ROUTES - General: The shortest practical, with as few bends as possible. - Bends in wet portion of soil stacks: Not permitted. - Routes not shown on drawings: Submit proposals before commencing work. 610 FIXING PIPEWORK - Pipework: Fix securely plumb and/ or true to line. Fix discharge stack pipes at or

close below socket collar or coupling. - Branches and low gradient sections: Fix with uniform and adequate falls to drain

efficiently. - Externally socketed pipes and fittings: Fix with sockets facing upstream. - Additional supports: Provide as necessary to support junctions and changes in

direction. - Vertical pipes: Provide a load bearing support not less than every storey level.

Tighten fixings as work proceeds so that every storey is self supporting. - Wall and floor penetrations: Isolate pipework from structure, e.g. with pipe

sleeves. - Masking plates: Fix at penetrations if visible in the finished work. - Expansion joint sockets: Fix rigidly to the building. - Fixings: Allow the pipe to slide. 615 FIXING VERTICAL PIPEWORK - Bracket fixings: Plugged and screwed to masonry. - Distance between bracket fixing centres (maximum): In accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations. 630 JOINTING PIPEWORK – GENERALLY - General: Joint with materials, fittings and techniques that will make effective and

durable connections. - Jointing differing pipework systems: With adaptors intended for the purpose. - Cut ends of pipes: Clean and square. Remove burrs and swarf. Chamfer pipe ends

before inserting into ring seal sockets. - Jointing or mating surfaces: Clean and, where necessary, lubricate immediately

before assembly. - Junctions: Form with fittings intended for the purpose. - Jointing material: Do not allow it to project into bore of pipes and fittings. - Surplus flux, solvent jointing materials and cement: Remove from joints.

Page 70: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/69 specification/preambles

660 JOINTING PIPEWORK – ABS, MUPVC, PVC-C AND PVC-U - Jointing: Solvent welded. 680 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY - Joints in metal pipes with flexible couplings: Make with clips (or suitable standard

pipe couplings) supplied for earth bonding by pipework manufacturer to ensure electrical continuity.

695 DISCHARGE AND VENTILATING STACKS - Terminations: Perforated cover or cage that does not restrict airflow. - Material: Plastics, as discharge stack. 700 INSTALLING AIR ADMITTANCE VALVES - Position: Vertical, above flood level of highest appliance served and clear of

insulation materials (other than the manufacturer’s insulating cover). - Connection to discharge stack: Allow removal for rodding, e.g. ring seal. - Roof spaces and other unheated locations: Fit manufacturer’s insulating cover. COMPLETION 905 PIPEWORK AIRTIGHTNESS TEST - Preparation: - Open ends of pipework: Temporarily seal using plugs. - Test apparatus: Connect a ‘U’ tube water gauge and air pump to pipework via a

plug or through trap of an appliance. - Testing: Pump air into pipework until gauge registers 38 mm. - Required performance: Pressure of 38 mm is to be maintained without loss for at

least three minutes. 915 PREHANDOVER CHECKS - Temporary caps: Remove. - Permanent blanking caps, access covers, rodding eyes, floor gratings and the like:

Secure complete with fixings.

Page 71: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/70 specification/preambles

R12 BELOW GROUND DRAINAGE SYSTEMS To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. PRODUCTS 313 ONE PIECE GULLIES - Standards: - Clay: To BS EN 295-1 and Kitemark certified, or Agrément certified. - Manufacturer: Hepworth Building Products Limited. - Product reference: Supersleve SDG3/2. - Outlet sizes: 100mm.

336 PIPES, BENDS AND JUNCTIONS - CLAY - FLEXIBLE JOINTS - Material and standard: Vitrified clay to BS EN 295-1, Kitemark certified. - Manufacturer: Hepworth Building Products Limited. - Product reference: Supersleve. - Sizes: DN100. - Jointing type: Flexible coupling. 483 CONCRETE (GENERAL) - Standard: To BS 8500-2. - Concrete: GEN 1. 496 GRANULAR MATERIAL - NATURAL - Standard: To BS EN 12620. - Size: Dependent on location - see Execution clauses in this section, and in sections

R16, R17 and R18, if used. EXECUTION 611 EXISTING DRAINS - Setting out: Before starting work, check invert levels and positions of existing

drains, sewers, inspection chambers and manholes against drawings. Report discrepancies.

- Protection: Protect existing drains to be retained and maintain normal operation if in use.

613 EXCAVATED MATERIAL - Turf, topsoil, hardcore, etc: Set aside for use in reinstatement. 616 SELECTED FILL FOR BACKFILLING - Selected fill: As-dug material, free from vegetable matter, rubbish, frozen soil

and material retained on a 40 mm sieve. - Compaction: By hand in 100 mm layers. 623 LOWER PART OF TRENCH - GENERAL - Trench up to 300 mm above crown of pipe: Vertical sides, width as small as

practicable. - Width (minimum): External diameter of pipe plus 300 mm.

Page 72: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/71 specification/preambles

631 TYPE OF SUBSOIL - General: Where type of subsoil at level of crown of pipe differs from that stated

for the type of bedding, surround or support, give notice. 635 FORMATION FOR BEDDINGS - Timing: Excavate to formation immediately before laying beddings or pipes. - Mud, rock projections, boulders and hard spots: Remove. Replace with

consolidated bedding material. - Local soft spots: Harden by tamping in bedding material. - Inspection of excavated formations: Give notice. 657 CLASS F BEDDING - Type of subsoil: 1V – Sandy clay. - Granular material: As clause 496. - Pipe sizes DN 100 and DN 150: Size 4/10. - Pipe sizes DN 225 and DN 300: Size 4/10 or 10/20. - Pipe sizes DN 375-500: Size 10/20. - Pipe sizes DN 600 and above: Size 10/20 or 20/40. - Bedding: - Material: Granular, compacted over full width of trench. - Thickness (minimum): 50 mm for sleeve jointed pipes, 100 mm for socket

jointed pipes. Where trench bottom is uneven, increase thickness by 100 mm. - Pipes: Dig slightly into bedding, rest uniformly on barrels and adjust to line and

gradient. - Initial testing before backfilling: Required. - Backfilling: - Material: Protective cushion of selected fill. - Depth: 150 mm (250 mm for adoptable sewers) above crown of pipe. - Compaction: By hand in 100 mm layers. 678 CLASS Z SURROUND - Type of subsoil: 1V – Sandy clay. - Blinding: - Material: Concrete (general). - Thickness (minimum): 25 mm. - Width: Full width of trench. - Allow to set before proceeding. - Pipes: - Temporary support: Folding wedges of compressible board. Prevent flotation. - Clearance under pipes (minimum): 100 mm. - Adjust pipes to line and gradient. - Initial testing before placing surround: Required. - Surround: - Material: Concrete (general). - Depth: To 150 mm above crown of pipe. - Width: Full width of trench. - Vertical construction joints: - Location: At face of flexible pipe joints. - Material: 18 mm thick compressible board precut to profile of pipe. - Socketed pipes: Fill gaps between spigots and sockets with resilient material to

prevent entry of concrete.

Page 73: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/72 specification/preambles

680 CONCRETE SURROUND FOR PIPE RUNS NEAR FOUNDATIONS - Class Z surround: Provide in locations where bottom of trench is lower than

bottom of foundation and as follows (horizontal clear distance between nearest edges of foundations and pipe trenches):

- Trenches less than 1 m from foundations: Top of concrete surround not lower than bottom of foundation.

- Trenches more than 1 m from foundations: Top of concrete surround not lower than D mm below bottom of foundation, where D mm is horizontal distance of trench from foundation, less 150 mm.

683 LAYING PIPELINES - Laying pipes: To true line and regular gradient on even bed for full length of

barrel with sockets (if any) facing up the gradient. - Ingress of debris: Seal exposed ends during construction. - Timing: Minimize time between laying and testing. 685 JOINTING PIPELINES - Connections: Durable, effective and free from leakage. - Junctions, including to differing pipework systems: With adaptors intended for the

purpose. - Cut ends of pipes: Clean and square. Remove burrs and swarf. Chamfer pipe ends

before inserting into ring seal sockets. - Jointing or mating surfaces: Clean and, where necessary, lubricate immediately

before assembly. - Allowance for movement: Provide and maintain appropriate clearance at ends of

spigots as fixing and jointing proceeds. - Jointing material: Do not allow to project into bore of pipes and fittings. 689 PIPELINES PASSING THROUGH STRUCTURES - Pipelines that must be cast in or fixed to structures (including manholes, catchpits

and inspection chambers): Provide 600 mm long rocker pipes adjacent to the external face of the structure (or both faces where appropriate, e.g. walls to footings), with flexible joints at both ends.

- Distance to rocker pipe from structure (maximum): 150 mm. - Provision for movement for pipelines that need not be cast in or fixed to

structures (e.g. walls to footings): - Rocker pipes as specified above; or - Openings in the structures to give 50 mm minimum clearance around the

pipeline. Closely fit a rigid sheet to each side of opening to prevent ingress of fill or vermin.

691 BENDS AT BASE OF SOIL STACKS - Type: Nominal 90° rest bend. - Radius to centreline of pipe (minimum): 200mm. - Height of invert of horizontal drain at base of stack below centreline of lowest

branch pipe (minimum): 450mm. - Bedding: Do not impair flexibility of pipe couplings. - Material: Concrete (general). 693 DIRECT CONNECTION OF GROUND FLOOR WCS TO DRAINS - Drop from crown of WC trap to invert of drain (maximum): 1.30m. - Horizontal distance from the drop to a ventilated drain (maximum): 6 m.

Page 74: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/73 specification/preambles

695 BACKDROP PIPES OUTSIDE MANHOLE WALLS - Excavation beneath backdrop pipe: Backfill. - Material: Concrete (general). - Pipe encasement: - Material: Concrete (general). - Thickness (minimum): 150 mm. 697 INSTALLING FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS - Ends of pipes to be joined: Cut cleanly and square. - Outer surfaces of pipes to be joined: Clean and smooth. Where necessary, e.g. on

concrete or iron pipes, smooth out mould lines and/ or apply a cement grout over the sealing area.

- Clamping bands: Tighten carefully to make gastight and watertight seals. 705 INITIAL TESTING OF PIPELINES - Before testing: - Cement mortar jointing: Leave 24 h. - Solvent welded pipelines: Leave 1 h. - Method: Block open ends of pipelines to be tested and pressurise. Air test short

lengths to BS EN 1610. 715 BACKFILLING TO PIPELINES - Backfilling above top of surround or protective cushion: Material excavated from

trench, compacted in layers 300 mm (maximum) thick. - Heavy compactors: Do not use before there is 600 mm (total) of material over

pipes. 720 BACKFILLING UNDER ROADS AND PAVINGS - Backfilling from top of surround or protective cushion up to formation level:

Granular sub-base material, laid and compacted in 150 mm layers. 734 INSTALLING ACCESS POINTS AND GULLIES - Bedding: - Material: Concrete (general). - Thickness (minimum): 150mm. - Surround: - Material: Concrete (general). - Thickness (minimum): 150mm. - Height: Full height - Backfilling: Not required. - Setting out relative to adjacent construction features: Square and tightly jointed. - Permissible deviation in level of external covers and gratings: +0 to -6 mm. - Raising pieces (clay and concrete units): Joint with 1:3 cement:sand mortar. - Exposed openings: Fit purpose made temporary caps. Protect from site traffic.

Page 75: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/74 specification/preambles

COMPLETION 901 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS AND CLEANING - Preparation: Lift covers to manholes, inspection chambers and access points.

Remove mortar droppings, debris and loose wrappings. - Timing: Before cleaning, final testing, CCTV inspection if specified, and

immediately before handover. - Cleaning: Thoroughly flush pipelines with water to remove silt and check for

blockages. Rod pipelines between access points if there is any indication that they may be obstructed.

- Washings and detritus: Do not discharge into sewers or watercourses. - Covers: Securely replace after cleaning and testing. 903 TEMPORARY MEASURES - Water used to stabilize tanks and the like during installation: Drain. 911 TESTING AND INSPECTION - Dates for testing and inspection: Give notice. - Period of notice: Three working days. 921 FINAL TESTING OF PRIVATE GRAVITY DRAINS AND SEWERS UP TO DN 300 - Before testing: - Cement mortar jointing: Leave 24 h. - Solvent welded pipelines: Leave 1 h. - Standard: To Building Regulations. - Method: - Air testing preparation and method: To BS 8301, clauses 25.6.3.1 and 25.6.3.2. - Initial testing: To ensure that pipelines are sound and properly installed, air test

short lengths to BS EN 1610, clauses 13.1 and 13.2 immediately after completion of bedding/ surround.

- Final testing: For final checking and statutory authority approval, water test to BS EN 1610, clause 13.1 and 13.3 all lengths of pipeline from terminals and connections to manholes/ chambers and between manholes/ chambers.

941 WATER TESTING OF MANHOLES AND INSPECTION CHAMBERS - Timing: Before backfilling. - Standard: - Exfiltration: To BS EN 1610. Method: Testing with water (method W). - Infiltration: No identifiable flow of water penetrating the chamber.

Page 76: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/75 specification/preambles

S90 HOT AND COLD WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS – DOMESTIC To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 210 DESIGN HOT AND COLD WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM - Design: Modify and/or extend hot and cold water supply system to installed

equipment and appliances. PRODUCTS 330 WATER SOFTENERS - Manufacturer: Scalemaster. - Product reference: Gold. 350 INSTANTANEOUS SHOWER UNITS, ELECTRIC - Standard: To BS EN 60335-2-35, BEAB approved. - Manufacturer: Kohler Mira Limited. - Product reference: Advance ATL Flex 9.0KW. - Accessories: Adjustable spray handset, slide bar with soap dish, flexible hose and

associated fittings. 352 INSTANTANEOUS SHOWER UNITS, ELECTRIC - Standard: To BS EN 60335-2-35, BEAB approved. - Manufacturer: Kohler Mira Limited. - Product reference: Sport 9.0KW. - Accessories: Adjustable spray handset, slide bar with soap dish, flexible hose and

associated fittings. 354 INSTANTANEOUS SHOWER UNITS, ELECTRIC - Standard: To BS EN 60335-2-35, BEAB approved. - Manufacturer: AKW Limited. - Product reference: Care 9.5KW. - Accessories: Adjustable spray handset, slide bar rail with soap dish, flexible hose

and associated fittings. 360 THERMOSTATIC SHOWER UNITS - Manufacturer: Kohler Mira Limited. - Product reference: Excel EV 9.0KW. - Accessories: Adjustable spray handset, slide bar, flexible hose and associated

fittings. 362 THERMOSTATIC SHOWER UNITS - Manufacturer: Kohler Mira Limited. - Product reference: Minilite EV Eco 9.0KW. - Accessories: Adjustable spray handset, slide bar, flexible hose and associated

fittings.

Page 77: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/76 specification/preambles

500 COPPER PIPELINES, CHROMIUM PLATED FOR EXPOSED HOT AND COLD SUPPLY TO SHOWER UNIT

- Standard: To BS EN 1057, Kitemark certified. - Finish: To BS EN 12540, service condition 2. - Temper: Half hard R250. - Wall thicknesses (nominal): - OD 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm: 0.6 mm. - OD 15 mm, 0.9 mm for 22 and 28 mm: 0.7 mm. - OD 35 and 42 mm: 1.2 mm. - Jointing: Type A compression fittings to BS EN 1254-2. - Finish: Chromium plate to BS EN 12540, service condition 3. - Connections to appliances and equipment: Select from: - Compression fittings: To BS EN 1254-2, Kitemark certified. - Fittings with threaded ends: To BS EN 1254-4. - Supports: One piece copper spacer clips. 510 COPPER PIPELINES FOR GENERAL USE - Standard: To BS EN 1057, Kitemark certified. - Temper: Half hard R250. - Wall thickness (nominal):

- OD 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm: 0.6 mm. - OD 15 mm: 0.7 mm. - OD 22 and 28 mm: 0.9 mm. - OD 35 and 42 mm: 1.2 mm. - Jointing generally: Integral lead free solder ring capillary fittings to BS EN 1254-1,

Kitemark certified. - Connections to appliances and equipment: Select from: - Compression fittings: To BS EN 1254-2, Kitemark certified. - Fittings with threaded ends: To BS EN 1254-4. - Supports: White plastics spacers, single screw fixing. 570 INSULATION TO PIPELINES - Material: Preformed flexible closed cell or mineral fibre split tube. - Thermal conductivity (maximum): 0.04 W/m•K. - Thickness: - Hot water pipelines: Equal to the outside diameter of the pipe up to a

maximum of 40 mm. - Internal cold water pipelines: 25 mm. - Roof space cold water pipelines: 32 mm. - External cold water pipelines: 38 mm. - Fire performance: Class 1 spread of flame when tested to BS 476-7. 620 VALVES GENERALLY - Types: Approved for the purpose by local water supply undertaker and of

appropriate pressure and/ or temperature ratings. - Control of valves: Fit with handwheels for isolation and lockshields for isolation

and regulation of circuits or equipment.

Page 78: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/77 specification/preambles

625 BALL VALVES - Standard: To BS EN 331.

- Type: Full bore quarter turn with lever handle, colour co-ordinated blue for cold and red of hot.

- Material: Copper alloy. - Finish: Chromium plated 630 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIES - Standard: Copper alloy check valves to BS 6282-1 with test cock to BS 2879

between. 640 DRAINING TAPS - Standard: Copper alloy to BS 2879, Type 1, hose connection pattern, Kitemark

certified. 650 FLOW REDUCING/SERVICING VALVES - Manufacturer: Contractors choice subject to CA approval. - Type: Screw operated ball type. - Material: Copper alloy. - Finish: Chromium plated 660 GATE VALVES - Standard: To BS 5154, Series B, Kitemark certified or BS EN 12288. 670 STOP VALVES AND DRAW-OFF TAPS, ABOVE GROUND - Standard: Copper alloy to BS 1010-2, Kitemark certified. 675 STOP VALVES, UNDERGROUND - Standard: DZR copper alloy CZ 132 to BS 5433. EXECUTION 715 INSTALLATION GENERALLY - Installation: To BS 6700. - Performance: Free from leaks and the audible effects of expansion, vibration and

water hammer. - Fixing of equipment, components and accessories: Fix securely, parallel or

perpendicular to the structure of the building. - Preparation: Immediately before installing tanks and cisterns on a floor or

platform, clear the surface completely of debris and projections. - Corrosion resistance: In locations where moisture is present or may occur, provide

corrosion resistant fittings/fixings and avoid contact between dissimilar metals by use of suitable washers, gaskets, etc.

730 INSTALLING WATER SOFTENERS - Position: Downstream of supply to drinking water taps. - Supply continuity: Fit bypass pipe and stop valves for continuity of water supply if

softener becomes inoperable or is removed. - Drains: Connect overflow/ drain lines to trap and waste. - Back siphonage: Provide for prevention of back siphonage of brine during

regeneration process.

Page 79: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/78 specification/preambles

790 PIPELINES INSTALLATION - Appearance: Install pipes straight, and parallel or perpendicular to walls, floors,

ceilings, and other building elements. - Pipelines finish: Smooth, consistent bore, clean, free from defects, e.g. external

scratching, toolmarks, distortion, wrinkling, and cracks. - Concealment: Generally conceal pipelines within floor, ceiling and/or roof voids. - Access: Locate runs to facilitate installation of equipment, accessories and

insulation and allow access for maintenance. - Arrangement of hot and cold pipelines: Run hot pipelines above cold where routed

together horizontally. Do not run cold water pipelines near to heating pipelines or through heated spaces.

- Electrical equipment: Install pipelines clear of electrical equipment. Do not run pipelines through electrical enclosures or above switch gear distribution boards or the like.

- Insulation allowance: Provide space around pipelines to fit insulation without compression.

800 PIPELINES FIXING - Fixing: Secure and neat. - Joints, bends and offsets: Minimize. - Pipeline support: Prevent strain, e.g. from the operation of taps or valves. - Drains and vents: Fix pipelines to falls. Fit draining taps at low points and vents at

high points. - Thermal expansion and contraction: Allow for thermal movement of pipelines.

Isolate from structure. Prevent noise or abrasion of pipelines caused by movement. Sleeve pipelines passing through walls, floors or other building elements.

- Dirt, insects or rodents: Prevent ingress. 810 SUPPORTS FOR COPPER AND STAINLESS STEEL PIPELINES - Spacing: Fix securely and true to line at the following maximum centres: - 15 and 22 mm pipe OD: 1200 mm horizontal, 1800 mm vertical. - 28 and 35 mm pipe OD: 1800 mm horizontal, 2400 mm vertical. - 42 and 54 mm pipe OD: 2400 mm horizontal, 3000 mm vertical. - Additional supports: Locate within 150 mm of connections, junctions and changes

of direction. 830 PIPELINE SPACING - Clearance (minimum) to face of wall-fixed pipes or pipe insulation: - From floor: 150 mm. - From ceiling: 50 mm. - From wall: 15 mm. - Between pipes: 25 mm. - From electrical conduit, cables, etc: 150 mm.

Page 80: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/79 specification/preambles

840 JOINTS IN COPPER AND STAINLESS STEEL PIPELINES - Preparation: Cut pipes square. Remove burrs. - Joints: Neat, clean and fully sealed. Install pipe ends into joint fittings to full

depth. - Bends: Do not use formed bends on exposed pipework, except for small offsets.

Form changes of direction with radius fittings. - Adaptors for connecting dissimilar materials: Purpose designed. - Substrate and plastics pipes and fittings: Do not damage, e.g. by heat when

forming soldered joints. - Flux residue: Clean off. 860 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION TO PIPELINES - Cold water pipelines: Insulate in unheated spaces. Insulate potable cold water

pipelines. - Hot water pipelines: Insulate, except for short lengths in prominent positions next

to appliances. - Appearance: Fix securely and neatly. Make continuous over fittings and at

supports. Leave no gaps. Locate split on ‘blind’ side of pipeline. - Timing: Fit insulation after testing. 870 INSTALLING VALVES - Isolation and regulation valves: Provide on equipment and subcircuits. - Access: Locate where valves can be readily operated and maintained and next to

equipment which is to be isolated. - Connection to pipework: Fit with joints to suit the pipe material. COMPLETION 910 FLUSHING AND FILLING - Standard: To BS 6700. 930 TESTING - Standard: To BS 6700. - Notice (minimum): 3 days. - Preparation: Secure and clean pipework and equipment. Fit cistern and tank

covers. - Leak testing: Start boiler and run the system until all parts are at normal

operating temperatures and then allow to cool to cold condition for a period of 3 h.

- Pressure testing: At both hot and cold conditions joints, fittings and components must be free from leaks and signs of physical distress when tested for at least 1 h as follows:

- Systems fed directly from the mains, and systems downstream of a booster pump: Apply a test pressure equal to 1.5 times the maximum pressure to which the installation or relevant part is designed to be subjected in operation.

- Systems fed from storage: Apply a test pressure equal to the pressure produced when the storage cistern is filled to its normal maximum operating level.

- Inaccessible or buried pipelines: Carry out hydraulic pressure test to twice the working pressure.

Page 81: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/80 specification/preambles

940 COMMISSIONING - Standard: To BS 6700. - Equipment: Check and adjust operation of equipment, controls and safety

devices. - Outlets: Check operation of outlets for satisfactory rate of flow and temperature. 950 TESTING SERVICE PIPELINES - Test method: Disconnect from the mains, fill with potable water, exclude air, and

apply at least twice the working pressure for 1 h. - Test criterion: No leakage. 960 DOCUMENTATION - Manufacturers’ operating and maintenance instructions: Submit for equipment and

controls. - System operating and maintenance instructions: Submit for the system as a whole

giving optimum settings for controls. 970 OPERATING TOOLS - Tools: Supply tools for operation, maintenance and cleaning purposes. - Valve keys: Supply keys for valves and vents. 980 LABELS - Valve labels: Provide labels on isolating and regulating valves on primary circuits,

stating their function.

Page 82: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/81 specification/preambles

S91 NATURAL GAS SUPPLY SYSTEMS - DOMESTIC To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 210 DESIGN GAS SUPPLY SYSTEM. - Design: Modify and/or extend gas supply system from meter to cooking

equipment position. - Pipeline sizing: Calculate sizes of gas pipes for the equipment proposed. - Equipment gas consumption: Cooker 4 m/hr. PRODUCTS 330 DOMESTIC LOW PRESSURE GAS SUPPLY PIPELINES FROM METER TO COOKING

POSITION - Standard: To BS 6891. - Copper pipelines: - To BS EN 1057, Kitemark certified. - Temper: Half hard R250. - Wall thickness (nominal): - OD 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm: 0.6 mm. - OD 15 mm: 0.7 mm. - OD 22 and 28 mm: 0.9 mm. - OD 35 and 42 mm: 1.2 mm. - Jointing: - Integral lead-free solder ring capillary fittings: To BS EN 1254-1, Kitemark

certified. - Connections to appliances and equipment: Select from: - Compression fittings: To BS EN 1254-2, Kitemark certified. - Fittings with threaded ends: To BS EN 1254-4. - Supports: White plastics spacers, single screw fixing. 340 GAS PLUG COCKS - Standard: To BS 1552.

EXECUTION 615 GAS INSTALLATION GENERALLY - Domestic gas pipelines: To BS 6891. - Requirement: All gas installation work to comply with the Gas Safety (Installation

and use) Regulations 1998. - Installer: All gas installation work is to be carried out by a competent skilled

person who is registered with the Gas Safety RegisterTM. When requested, provide all necessary documents to the Contract Administrator to confirm registration.

Page 83: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/82 specification/preambles

COMPLETION 910 TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND PURGING GAS PIPELINES - Standard: To BS 6891. 920 DOCUMENTATION - Manufacturers' operating and maintenance instructions: Submit for equipment and

controls. 985 DOCUMENTATION - Submit: The following documentation on completion of the work:

Approved gas test certificate. One scanned original copy for each property to be e-mailed to Contract Administrator

- Original certificate(s): Practical completion of the works will not be achieved until receipt of document.

Page 84: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/83 specification/preambles

T90 HEATING SYSTEMS - DOMESTIC To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 210 DESIGN HEATING SYSTEM.

- Design: Modify and/or extend heating system to installed equipment. PRODUCTS 395 COPPER PIPELINES FOR GENERAL USE - Standard: To BS EN 1057, Kitemark certified. - Temper: Half hard R250. - Wall thickness (nominal): - OD 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm: 0.6 mm. - OD 15 mm: 0.7 mm. - OD 22 and 28 mm: 0.9 mm. - OD 35 and 42 mm: 1.2 mm. - Microbore temper: Soft coil R220. - Microbore wall thickness (nominal): - OD 6 and 8 mm: 0.6 mm. - OD 10 mm: 0.7 mm. - Jointing: - Integral lead-free solder ring capillary fittings: To BS EN 1254-1, Kitemark

certified. - Connections to appliances and equipment: Select from: - Compression fittings: To BS EN 1254-2, Kitemark certified. - Fittings with threaded ends: To BS EN 1254-4. - Supports: White plastics spacers, single screw fixing. 425 VALVES GENERALLY - Types: Approved for the purpose by local water supply undertaker and of

appropriate pressure and temperature ratings. - Control of valves: Fit with handwheels for isolation and lockshields for isolation

and regulation of circuits or equipment. 440 THERMOSTATIC RADIATOR VALVES - Standard: To BS EN 215 and capable of providing isolation. - Manufacturer: Siemans. - Product reference: Trade TRV. - Finish: Nickel plated. - Lockshield valves: To BS 2767 with matching finish fitted to return side of

radiator.

Page 85: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/84 specification/preambles

450 INSULATION TO PIPELINES - Material: Preformed flexible closed cell or mineral fibre split tube. - Thermal conductivity (maximum): 0.04 W/m² - K. - Thicknesses (minimum): - Heating and primary pipelines: Equal to the outside diameter of the pipe up to

a maximum of 40 mm. - Internal cold water pipelines: 25 mm. - Roof space cold water pipelines: 32 mm. - External cold water pipelines: 38 mm - Fire performance: Class 0 spread of flame then tested to BS 476-7. 455 FAN CONVECTOR HEATERS - Standards: To BS EN 442-1, -2, -3 and BS 4856-1, -2, -3, -4. - Type: Wall mounted unit. - Manufacturer: Dimplex UK Limited. - Product reference: FX20V. - Output: 2kW. - Casing finish: White. - Features: Neon indicator with pull cord operation. 465 RADIATORS - Standard: To BS EN 442-1, -2 and -3. - Type: Single or double convector. - Manufacturer: Caradon Plumbing Limited. - Product reference: Stelrad Elite. - Material: Steel. - Finish: White stove enamelled. - Sizes: To suit system requirements. EXECUTION 610 INSTALLATION GENERALLY - Performance: Free from leaks and the audible effects of expansion, vibration and

water hammer. - Fixing of equipment, components and accessories: Fix securely, parallel or

perpendicular to the structure of the building. - Preparation: Immediately before installing tanks and cisterns on a floor or

platform, clear the surface completely of debris and projections. - Corrosion resistance: In locations where moisture is present or may occur, use

corrosion resistant fittings/ fixings and avoid contact between dissimilar metals by use of suitable washers, gaskets, etc.

Page 86: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/85 specification/preambles

630 PIPELINE INSTALLATION - Appearance: Install pipes straight, and parallel or perpendicular to walls, floors,

ceilings, and other building elements. - Pipelines finish: Smooth, consistent bore, clean, free from defects, e.g. external

scratching, toolmarks, distortion, wrinkling, and cracks. - Concealment: Generally conceal pipelines within floor, ceiling and/ or roof voids. - Access: Locate runs to facilitate installation of equipment, accessories and

insulation and allow access for maintenance. - Arrangement of hot and cold pipelines: Run hot pipelines above cold where routed

together horizontally. Do not run cold water pipelines near to heating pipelines or through heated spaces.

- Electrical equipment: Install pipelines clear of electrical equipment. Do not run pipelines through electrical enclosures or above switch gear distribution boards or the like.

- Insulation allowance: Provide space around pipelines to fit insulation without compression.

640 PIPELINE FIXING - Fixing: Secure and neat. - Joints, bends and offsets: Minimize. - Pipeline support: Prevent strain, e.g. from the operation of taps or valves. - Drains and vents: Fix pipelines to falls. Fit draining taps at low points and vents at

high points. - Thermal expansion and contraction: Allow for thermal movement of pipelines.

Isolate from structure. Prevent noise or abrasion of pipelines caused by movement. Sleeve pipelines passing through walls, floors or other building elements.

- Dirt, insects or rodents: Prevent ingress. 650 JOINTS IN COPPER PIPELINES - Preparation: Cut pipes square. Remove burrs. - Joints: Neat, clean and fully sealed. Install pipe ends into joint fittings to full

depth. - Bends: Do not use formed bends on exposed pipework, except for small offsets.

Form changes of direction with radius fittings. - Adaptors for connecting dissimilar materials: Purpose designed. - Substrate and plastics pipes and fittings: Do not damage, e.g. by heat when

forming soldered joints. - Flux residue: Clean off.

Page 87: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/86 specification/preambles

COMPLETION 910 TESTING - Notice (minimum): 3 days. - Preparation: Secure and clean pipework and equipment. Fit cistern/ tank covers. - Leak testing: Start boiler and run the system until parts are at normal operating

temperatures and then allow to cool to cold condition for a period of 3 h. - Pressure testing: At both hot and cold conditions joints, fittings and components

must be free from leaks and signs of physical distress when tested for at least 1 h as follows:

- Systems fed directly from the mains and systems downstream of a booster pump: Apply a test pressure equal to 1.5 times the maximum pressure to which the installation or relevant part is designed to be subjected in operation.

- Systems fed from storage: Apply a test pressure equal to the pressure produced when the storage cistern is filled to its normal maximum operating level.

- Inaccessible or buried pipelines: Carry out hydraulic pressure test to twice the working pressure.

920 SETTING TO WORK AND COMMISSIONING - Equipment: Check and adjust operation of equipment, controls and safety

devices. - Outlets: Check operation of outlets for satisfactory rate of flow and temperature. 950 LABELS - Valve labels: Provide labels on isolating and regulating valves on primary circuits,

stating their function. 985 DOCUMENTATION - Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions: One copy to be left with

tenant. - Submit: The following documentation on completion of the work:

Oil test certificate. Oil risk spillage assessment certificate (OFTEC Technical Sheet T1/133). Benchmark book. Approved gas test certificate. One scanned original copy for each property to be e-mailed to Contract Administrator. Part L certificate. One original copy for each property to tenant and Contract Administrator

- Original certificate(s): Practical completion of the works will not be achieved until receipt of documents.

Page 88: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/87 specification/preambles

V90 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - DOMESTIC To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 210 GENERAL DESIGN - Standards: To BS 7671 and the requirements of the electricity distributor. - Design: Complete the design and detailing of the electrical installation. 235 ARRANGEMENTS OF PARTICULAR CIRCUITS - Separation: Divide installation into separately controlled circuits: - Kitchen power ring circuit. - Cooker circuit. - Further subdivision: As required.

275 SMALL POWER DESIGN - Small power outlets: Provide to serve the building and its equipment. - Room:

- Fixed equipment: Provide supplies. 280 EARTHING AND BONDING DESIGN - Earthing, main bonding, supplementary bonding and protective conductors: In

accordance with BS 7430.

- Utility room/Store 1 double switched socket

- Kitchen 3 double switched sockets

- Kitchen (washing machine/refrigerator position)

Switched fused connection unit (above worktop) and I single socket outlet located adjacent to appliance

Kitchen (cooker position) Cooker control panel (above worktop adjacent to appliance) and cooker cable outlet (below worktop behind appliance)

Kitchen/airing cupboard (boiler position)

Switched fused connection unit with neon indicator and flex outlet in base located adjacent to appliance

- Dining room/Kitchen combined 4 double switched sockets

- Dining room/Lounge combined 3 double switched sockets

Page 89: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/88 specification/preambles

PRODUCTS 310 PRODUCTS GENERALLY - Standard: To BS 7671. - CE Marking: Required. 312 MAINS SUPPLY ISOLATOR - Manufacturer: Wylex. - Product reference: REC2S. - Main control: Double pole switch. - Rating: 100A. - Location: To be confirmed with CA. 320 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND CONSUMER UNITS - Standard: To BS EN 61439-3. - Manufacturer: Wylex. - Product reference: High Integrity Dual RCD from NM All Metal range. - Main control: Switch disconnector. - Rating: To suit maximum demand. - Number of ways: 10 (NMRS44206) or 15 (NMRS76206). - Spare capacity: 2 number spare ways minimum. - Circuit protection: Miniature circuit-breakers. - Standard: To BS EN 60898. - Additional circuit protection: 30mA RCD’s to protect all circuits. - Standard: To BS EN 61008 or BS EN 61009. - Enclosure: - All metal with lid, surface mounted on pattress. - Location: As existing unless otherwise specified. 355 PVC TRUNKING SYSTEMS - Standard: To BS 4678-4. - Manufacturer: MK Electric Limited. - Product reference: EGA Mini Trunking. - Sizes: To suit installation. - Accessories and fittings: Factory made of the same material type, finish and

thickness as cable trunking. - Strength class: Light duty. - Colour: White. 410 CABLES - Standard: To BS 7671. - Approval: British Approvals Service for Cables (BASEC) certified. - Mineral insulated copper sheathed cables: To BS EN 60702-1. - Mineral insulated copper sheathed cable terminations: To BS EN 60702-2. - Cable sizes not stated: Submit proposals and calculations. 420 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS - Type: Cable conductors with yellow/ green sheath.

Page 90: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/89 specification/preambles

430 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES - Standard: To BS 5733. - Switches: To BS EN 60669-1. - Manufacturer: MK Electric Limited. - Product reference: Logic Plus. - Finish: White plastic. - Mounting: Recessed. 490 LUMINAIRES BATTEN LAMPHOLDER - Manufacturer: Ashley. - Product reference: Access BC straight batten lampholder ref SEL96T. - Mounting: Ceiling. - Lamp: Existing lamp from removed fitting to be reused.

492 LUMINAIRES PENDANT - Manufacturer: Ashley. - Product reference: Safety pendant set with 150mm short skirt ref 624SEL2126. - Mounting: Ceiling. - Lamp: Existing lamp from removed fitting to be reused.

495 LUMINAIRES LINEAR FLUORESCENT - Manufacturer: Thorn. - Product reference: 1500 Popular Range with diffuser. - Mounting: Ceiling. - Lamp: Tubular fluorescent. - Wattage: 58 W high efficiency white T8. 500 LUMINAIRES LINEAR FLUORESCENT - Manufacturer: Newlec. - Product reference: NL10996. - Mounting: Under wall unit. - Lamp: Tubular fluorescent. - Wattage: 6W. - Product reference: NL10998. - Mounting: Under wall unit. - Lamp: Tubular fluorescent. - Wattage: 14W. 505 LUMINAIRES BULKHEAD - Manufacturer: LED Group.

- Product reference: Robus R100LED-01. - Mounting: Ceiling. - Lamp: SMD LED. - Wattage: 10 W. 508 EXTENAL LUMINAIRES PIR BULKHEAD - Manufacturer: Timeguard Limited, Victory Park, 400 Edgware Road, London, NW2 6ND.

- Product reference: SLB88. - Mounting: Wall. - Lamp: Megaman Liliput low energy compact fluorescent ref SLU214i with E27 base. - Wattage: 14 W.

Page 91: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/90 specification/preambles

511 LAMPS GENERALLY - Standards: - Compact fluorescent lamps: To BS EN 60901 and BS EN 61199. - High pressure mercury lamps: To BS EN 60188 and BS EN 62035. - High pressure sodium lamps: To BS EN 62035. - Metal halide lamps: To BS EN 62035. - Tubular fluorescent lamps: - Single-capped lamps: To BS EN 60901 and BS EN 61199. - Double-capped lamps: To BS EN 60081 and BS EN 61195. - Tungsten halogen lamps: To BS EN 60432-2 and BS EN 60357. - Manufacturer: As specified. - Lamps of the same type and rating: Same manufacturer. 515 LUMINAIRE SUPPORTING COUPLERS - Standard: To BS 6972. 568 VENTILATION FAN UNIT TO BATHROOM

- Standard: To BS EN 60335-2-80. BEAB approved. - Manufacturer: Greenwood Air Management Limited. - Product reference: Unity CV2GIP. - Mounting: Wall (surface mounted). - Controls: Wire into lighting circuit with isolator switch at high level. - Accessories: 100mm diameter rigid plastic wall ducting and external louvred grille,

colour white. 570 VENTILATION FAN UNIT TO BATHROOM - Standard: To BS EN 60335-2-80. BEAB approved. - Manufacturer: Greenwood Air Management Limited - Product reference: Unity CV2GIP. - Mounting: Ceiling (surface mounted). - Controls: Wire into lighting circuit with isolator switch at high level. - Accessories: 100mm diameter insulated flexible ducting (1.5m long) and 100mm

diameter rigid plastic ducting (1.0m long) with pipe clip and vent cowl. - Pipe flashing: Carefully remove existing tile. Fit Osma pipe flashing reference

4S285, 600 x 600. Dress over adjacent tiling. 572 VENTILATION FAN UNIT TO BATHROOM

- Standard: To BS EN 60335-2-80. BEAB approved. - Manufacturer: Greenwood Air Management Limited - Product reference: Unity CV2SVGIP - Mounting: Wall (surface mounted). - Controls: Unit to be safety extra low voltage (SELV) with remote transformer.

Wire into lighting circuit with isolator switch at high level. - Accessories: 100mm diameter rigid plastic wall ducting and external louvred grille,

colour white.

Page 92: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/91 specification/preambles

575 VENTILATION FAN UNIT TO KITCHEN - Standard: To BS EN 60335-2-80.BEAB approved. - Manufacturer: Greenwood Air Management Limited - Product Reference: Unity CV2GIP. - Mounting: Wall (surface mounted). - Controls: Wire into lighting circuit with isolator switch located adjacent to fan at

high level. - Accessories: 100mm diameter rigid plastic wall ducting and external louvred grille,

colour white.

578 VENTILATION FAN UNIT TO KITCHEN - Standard: To BS EN 60335-2-80. BEAB approved. - Manufacturer: Greenwood Air Management Limited - Product reference: Unity CV2GIP. - Mounting: Ceiling (surface mounted). - Controls: Wire into lighting circuit with isolator switch located adjacent to fan at

high level. - Accessories: 100mm diameter insulated flexible ducting (1.5m long) and 100mm

diameter rigid plastic ducting (1.0m long) with pipe clip and vent cowl. - Pipe flashing: Carefully remove existing tile. Fit Osma pipe flashing reference

4S285, 600 x 600. Dress over adjacent tiling. 580 EARTHING AND BONDING - Earth electrodes: In accordance with BS 7430. - Earth clamps: To BS 951. EXECUTION 610 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION GENERALLY

- Standard: To BS 7671. - Installer: All electrical work is to be carried out by a firm who is a member of the

National Inspection Council for Electrical Installation Contractors (NICEIC), Electrical Service Providers Association (ECA) ) or similar approved organisation. If the contractor is not registered, they will be required to sublet the work to a sub-contractor who is, and the sub-contractor will be regarded as a domestic sub-contractor. When requested, provide all necessary documents to the Contract Administrator to confirm registration.

630 INSTALLING CONNECTION TO INCOMING SUPPLY - Main switchboard/ distribution board: Connect to main incoming metering

equipment. 720 INSTALLING CABLE TRAY - Support: Submit proposals. - Access: Provide space encompassing cable trays to permit access for installing and

maintaining cables. - Supports and fasteners: Avoid contact between dissimilar metals. Use corrosion

resistant components in locations where moisture may occur. - Cutting: Along an unperforated line. Minimize. Make good edges. Treat surface as

the tray.

Page 93: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/92 specification/preambles

730 INSTALLING CABLE BASKET - Support: Submit proposals. - Access: Provide space encompassing cable basket to permit access for installing

and maintaining cables. - Fittings: Side action bolt croppers. - Supports and fasteners: Avoid contact between dissimilar metals. Use corrosion

resistant components in locations where moisture may occur. 750 INSTALLING TRUNKING/ DUCTING SYSTEMS - Positioning: Accurate with respect to equipment served, and parallel with other

services and where relevant, floor level and other building lines. - Access: Provide space encompassing cable trunking to permit access for installing

and maintaining cables. - Jointing: - Number of joints: Minimize. - Lengths of trunking/ ducting: Maximize. - Steel systems: Mechanical couplings. Do not weld. Fit a copper link at each

joint to ensure electrical continuity. - Movement: Fix securely. Restrain floor mounted systems during screeding. - Junctions and changes of direction: Proprietary jointing units. - Cable entries: Fit grommets, bushes or liners. - Internal fire barriers: Provide to maintain integrity of fire compartment. - Protection: Fit temporary blanking plates. Prevent ingress of screed and other

extraneous materials. - Service outlet units: Fit when cables are installed. 800 CABLE ROUTES - Cables generally: Conceal wherever possible. - Concealed cable runs to wall switches and outlets: Align vertically with the

accessory. - Exposed cable runs: Submit proposals. - Orientation: Straight, vertical and/ or horizontal and parallel to walls. - Distance from other services running parallel: 150 mm minimum. - Heating pipes: Position cables below. 810 INSTALLING CABLES - General: Install cables neatly and securely. Protect against accidental damage,

adverse environmental conditions, mechanical stress and deleterious substances. - Timing: Do not start internal cabling until building enclosure provides permanently

dry conditions. - Jointing: At equipment and terminal fittings only. - Cables passing through walls: Sleeve with conduit bushed at both ends. - Cables surrounded or covered by insulation: Derate. 811 INSTALLING CABLES IN PLASTER - Protection: Cover with plastic channel nailed to substrate. 812 INSTALLING CABLES IN VERTICAL TRUNKING/ DUCTS - Support: Pin racks or cleats at each floor level or at 5 m vertical centres,

whichever is less. - Heat barrier centres (maximum): 5 m. - Heat barriers: Required except where fire resisting barriers are not provided.

Page 94: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/93 specification/preambles

813 INSTALLING CABLES IN ACCESSIBLE ROOF SPACES - Cables running across ceiling joists: Fix to timber battens which are nailed to

joists. 820 INSTALLING ARMOURED CABLE - Temperature: Do not start installation if cable or ambient temperature is below

0°C, or has been below 0°C during the previous 24 hours. - Galvanized steel guards: Fit where cables are vulnerable to mechanical damage. - Earthing: Bond armour to equipment and main earthing system. - Connections to apparatus: Moisture proof, sealed glands and PVC shrouds. 825 INSTALLING PVC SHEATHED CABLE - Temperature: Do not install cables if ambient temperature is below 5°C. 830 INSTALLING MICC CABLE - Bending: Do not corrugate sheath. - Connection to equipment and boxes: Fit PVC shrouded glands. - Testing: Test each length immediately after fixing. Repeat test 24-48 hours later. 840 INSTALLING ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES/ EQUIPMENT - Arrangement: Coordinate with other wall or ceiling mounted equipment. - Positioning: Accurately and square to vertical and horizontal axes. - Alignment: Align adjacent accessories on the same vertical or horizontal axis. - Mounting: Recessed. - Mounting heights (finished floor level to underside of equipment/accessory): - Socket outlets 450mm to bottom edge - Socket outlets above worktops 1125mm to bottom edge - Cooker control outlet 1125mm to bottom edge - Light switches 1150mm to bottom edge 845 FINAL CONNECTIONS - Size: Determine. - Cable: Heat resisting white flex. - Length: Allow for equipment removal and maintenance. 850 INSTALLING MULTIGANG SWITCHES - General: Connect switches so that there is a logical relationship with luminaire

positions. Fit blanks to unused switch spaces. - Segregation: Internally segregate each phase with phase barriers with warning

plates. 860 INSTALLING LUMINAIRES - Orientation: Parallel with ceiling. - Supports: Adequate for weight of luminaire. 880 INSTALLING EARTH BARS - Location: At incoming electrical service position. - Mounting: Wall mounted on insulated supports.

Page 95: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/94 specification/preambles

890 LABELLING - Identification and notices: - Standards: To BS 5499-5 and BS 5378-2. - Equipment: Label when a voltage exceeding 230 V is present. - Distribution boards and consumer units: Card circuit chart within a reusable clear

plastic cover. Fit to the inside of each unit. Include typed information identifying the outgoing circuit references, their device rating, cable type, size, circuit location and details. Label each outgoing way corresponding to the circuit chart.

- Sub-main cables: Label at both ends with proprietary cable marker sleeves. 895 ENGRAVING - Metal and plastic accessories: Engrave, indicating their purpose. - Emergency lighting test key switches: Describe their function. - Multigang light switches: Describe the luminaire arrangement. COMPLETION 900 MAKING GOOD - Painting and decorating is excluded from “Making Good” except any required as a

result of the Installer’s negligence. - All brickwork, concrete, plaster etc., which has been cut away by the Installer, all

damage caused by and all holes made by the Installer (including damage and holes in floors, wall and ceilings) shall be made good. New plaster work shall be trowelled off to a smooth, flat finish flush with existing finish.

- Undamaged skirting board, picture rail and other woodwork etc., which the installer has removed shall be replaced and matching woodwork shall be fitted to replace that which has been damaged as a result of the works. All work including any joints shall be clean and neat.

- Cupboard shelves, which have been removed, shall be replaced, provided these can be refixed in the position previously occupied. New shelving shall not be installed, unless at an additional charge and specified by separate instruction.

- Should floorboards need to be removed, this work shall be carried out in a workmanlike manner using a floorboard saw and boards shall be replaced and held firmly in position with counter sunk screws only. Floorboards damaged by the installer beyond the point of re-use shall be replaced with correctly sized floorboard timber.

- Lifting and replacement of hardboard floors is not included and, where necessary, this work shall be undertaken by others.

- No responsibility is undertaken by the installer for the making good on linoleum, vinyl or similar floor covering which cannot be removed without causing damage, but every possible care shall be taken to avoid damage.

- Existing unsound flooring or damage to flooring etc., not caused by the installer, shall be reported to the Contract Administrator IMMEDIATELY this has been discovered.

Page 96: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/95 specification/preambles

910 FINAL FIX - Accessory faceplates, luminaires and other equipment: Fit after completion of

building painting. 915 CLEANING - Electrical equipment: Clean immediately before handover. - Equipment not supplied but installed under the electrical works: Clean

immediately before handover. 920 INSPECTION AND TESTING GENERALLY - Standard: To BS 7671-7. - Notice before commencing tests (minimum): 24 hours. - Labels and signs: Fix securely before system is tested. 985 DOCUMENTATION - Submit: The following documentation on completion of the work:

Approved electrical installation test certificate. One scanned original copy for each property to be e-mailed to Contract Administrator. Part P certificate. One original copy for each property to tenant and Contract Administrator.

- Original certificate(s): Practical completion of the works will not be achieved until receipt of document.

Page 97: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/96 specification/preambles

Z12 PRESERVATIVE/ FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. 110 TREATMENT APPLICATION - Timing: After cutting and machining timber, and before assembling components. - Processor: Licensed by manufacturer of specified treatment solution. - Certification: For each batch of timber provide a certificate of assurance that

treatment has been carried out as specified. 120 COMMODITY SPECIFICATIONS - Standard: Current edition of the British Wood Preserving and Damp-proofing

Association (BWPDA) Manual. 130 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT SOLUTION STRENGTHS/ TREATMENT CYCLES - General: Select to achieve specified service life and to suit treatability of

specified wood species. 138 ALKALINE COPPER QUATERNARY (ACQ) ORGANIC PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT - Solution: - Manufacturer: Contractor’s choice subject to CA approval. - Application: High pressure impregnation. - Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: Not more than 28%. After

treatment, allow timber to dry before using. 158 ORGANIC SOLVENT PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT - Solution: - Manufacturer: Contractor’s choice subject to CA approval. - Application: Double vacuum + low pressure impregnation, or immersion. - Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: As specified for the timber/

component at time of fixing. After treatment, timber to be surface dry before use.

Page 98: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/97 specification/preambles

Z20 FIXINGS AND ADHESIVES

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. PRODUCTS 310 FASTENERS GENERALLY - Materials: To have: - Bimetallic corrosion resistance appropriate to items being fixed. - Atmospheric corrosion resistance appropriate to fixing location. - Appearance: Submit samples on request. 320 PACKINGS - Materials: Noncompressible, corrosion proof. - Area of packings: Sufficient to transfer loads. 340 MASONRY FIXINGS - Light duty: Plugs and screws. - Heavy duty: Expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 350 PLUGS - Type: Proprietary types to suit substrate, loads to be supported and conditions

expected in use. 390 ADHESIVES GENERALLY - Standards: - Hot-setting phenolic and aminoplastic: To BS 1203. - Thremosetting wood adhesives: To BS EN 12765. - Polyvinyl acetate thermoplastic adhesive: To BS 4071. 410 POWDER ACTUATED FIXING SYSTEMS - Types of fastener, accessories and consumables: As recommended by tool

manufacturer. 610 FIXING GENERALLY - Integrity of supported components: Select types, sizes, quantities and spacings of

fixings, fasteners and packings to retain supported components without distortion or loss of support.

- Components, substrates, fixings and fasteners of dissimilar metals: Isolate with washers/ sleeves to avoid bimetallic corrosion.

- Appearance: Fixings to be in straight lines at regular centres. 620 FIXING THROUGH FINISHES - Penetration of fasteners and plugs into substrate: To achieve a secure fixing. 630 FIXING PACKINGS - Function: To take up tolerances and prevent distortion of materials and

components. - Limits: Do not use packings beyond thicknesses recommended by fixings and

fasteners manufacturer. - Locations: Not within zones to be filled with sealant.

Page 99: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/98 specification/preambles

640 FIXING CRAMPS - Cramp positions: Maximum 150 mm from each end of frame sections and at 600

mm maximum centres. - Fasteners: Fix cramps to frames with screws of same material as cramps. - Fixings in masonry work: Fully bed in mortar. 670 PELLETED COUNTERSUNK SCREW FIXING - Finished level of countersunk screw heads: Minimum 6 mm below timber surface. - Pellets: Cut from matching timber, match grain and glue in to full depth of hole. - Finished level of pellets: Flush with surface. 680 PLUGGED COUNTERSUNK SCREW FIXING - Finished level of countersunk screw heads: Minimum 6 mm below timber surface. - Plugs: Glue in to full depth of hole. - Finished level of plugs: Projecting above surface. 690 USING POWDER ACTUATED FIXING SYSTEMS - Powder actuated fixing tools: To BS 4078-2 and Kitemark certified. - Operatives: Trained and certified as competent by tool manufacturer. 700 APPLYING ADHESIVES - Surfaces: Clean. Adjust regularity and texture to suit bonding and gap filling

characteristics of adhesive. - Support and clamping during setting: Provide as necessary. Do not mark

surfaces of or distrort components being fixed. - Finished adhesive joints: Fully bonded. Free of surplus adhesive.

Page 100: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

2/99 specification/preambles

Z22 SEALANTS To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. EXECUTION 610 SUITABILITY OF JOINTS - Presealing checks: - Joint dimensions: Within limits specified for the sealant. - Substrate quality: Surfaces regular, undamaged and stable. - Joints not fit to receive sealant: Submit proposals for rectification. 620 PREPARING JOINTS - Surfaces to which sealant must adhere: - Remove temporary coatings, tapes, loosely adhering material, dust, oil, grease,

surface water and contaminants that may affect bond. - Clean using materials and methods recommended by sealant manufacturer. - Vulnerable surfaces adjacent to joints: Mask to prevent staining or smearing with

primer or sealant. - Backing strip and/ or bond breaker installation: Insert into joint to correct depth,

without stretching or twisting, leaving no gaps. - Protection: Keep joints clean and protect from damage until sealant is applied. 630 APPLYING SEALANTS - Substrate: Dry (unless recommended otherwise) and unaffected by frost, ice or

snow. - Environmental conditions: Do not dry or raise temperature of joints by heating. - Sealant application: Fill joints completely and neatly, ensuring firm adhesion to

substrates. - Sealant profiles: - Butt and lap joints: Slightly concave. - Fillet joints: Flat or slightly convex. - Protection: Protect finished joints from contamination or damage until sealant has

cured.

Page 101: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/1 preliminaries/general conditions

A10 PROJECT PARTICULARS 110 THE PROJECT:

Nature: Installation of replacement kitchen units, sanitary appliances and other adaptations to bathrooms and formation of ramps/steps.

Location: Within the Contract Area defined in clause A12/100. 120 EMPLOYER (CLIENT)

Name: The Havebury Housing Partnership Address: Havebury House, Western Way, Bury St. Edmunds, IP33 3SP.

130 THE PRINCIPAL CONTRACTOR Name: The Contractor. 140 PERSON EMPOWERED BY THE CONTRACT TO ACT ON BEHALF OF THE EMPLOYER

Title: Contract Administrator (hereinafter referred to as 'CA') Name: Matthew Dick. Address: Havebury House, Western Way, Bury St. Edmunds, IP33 3SP. Telephone: (01284) 722060 Fax: (01284) 722155

150 PRINCIPAL DESIGNER

Name: Steve Adams Address: Havebury House, Western Way, Bury St. Edmunds, IP33 3SP Telephone: (01284) 722067 Fax: (01284) 722155

A11 TENDER AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 160 PRECONSTRUCTION INFORMATION

Format: The Preconstruction Information is described in these preliminaries and general conditions in clause A34/110. It refers to information given elsewhere in the preliminaries and other tender documents.

Page 102: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/2 preliminaries/general conditions

A12 THE SITE/EXISTING BUILDINGS 100 THE CONTRACT AREA

Description: The Contractor will be required to carry out the specified works to bungalows, houses, maisonettes, flats (up to three stories) and supported housing schemes within a thirty mile radius of Bury St. Edmunds.

200 ACCESS TO THE SITE Occupied properties: The Contractor will be required to make his own

arrangements with the tenants regarding suitable times for entry and no claims will be considered by the CA with regard to abortive calls and execution of the work in occupied properties.

Vacant (void) properties: Will be fitted with a key safe (by Employer) before the

Contractor commences any work to property. The Contractor will need to contact the CA to obtain access codes to safe.

Keys are to be returned to key safe once access to property has been achieved. Do not remove keys from property safe during the day or overnight. The Contractor will be responsible for the safe keeping of all keys and will be liable for the cost of replacing locks if keys are lost or damaged.

General: The Contractor shall be deemed to have acquainted himself with all

conditions likely to affect the execution of the works including safety and other regulations in force on the properties and any requirements of the Local Authorities and Public Utilities. No claim by the Contractor for additional payment shall be allowed on the grounds of any misunderstanding or misinterpretation due to lack of knowledge of these conditions, regulations or requirements.

210 PARKING Restrictions on parking of the Contractor's and employees' vehicles: Public parking

areas or by arrangement with the CA ‘residents only’ parking areas. Contractors and employees' vehicles are not to be parked on verges or green swards even where this is common practice in a particular area.

240 HEALTH AND SAFETY HAZARDS Information: Asbestos survey information (see clause A31/490). The accuracy and sufficiency of this information is not guaranteed by the

Employer or the Employer’s representative. Ascertain if any additional information is required to ensure the safety of all persons and the Works. Site staff: Draw to the attention of all personnel working on the site the nature of any possible contamination and the need to take appropriate precautionary measures.

Page 103: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/3 preliminaries/general conditions

A13 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK 115 PREPARATION WORK BY OTHERS Description: It is expected that tenants will have cleared contents from all

cupboards, pantries or kitchen units prior to work commencing on site. If this transpires not to be the case then the Contractor should notify the Employer immediately.

120 THE WORK Description: The work will comprise one or more of the following items:

demolition of internal walls and/or chimney stacks, infilling door or window openings with associated making good to roof, ceilings, wall and floor finishings.

dry lining existing walls as specified removal of existing kitchen furniture, sinktops and the like and installation of

new kitchen units, wall cupboards, sinktops, wall and floor tiling, extractor fan with associated alterations to electrical and plumbing installations.

removal of existing sanitary appliances with associated fittings and installation of new sanitary appliances, wall and floor tiling, extractor fan with associated alterations to electrical and plumbing installations. The work may involve replacing one or more sanitary appliances located within a bathroom or cloak room.

adaptation of bathroom other minor adaptations e.g. ramps/steps.

135 WORK BY OTHERS CONCURRENT WITH THE CONTRACT Scope: Additional works to rewire properties maybe carried out by others on

behalf of the employer within the Contract Area.

Page 104: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/4 preliminaries/general conditions

A20 JCT MEASURED TERM CONTRACT 710 JCT MEASURED TERM CONTRACT (MTC) The contract: JCT Measured Term Contract, 2011 Edition incorporating

Amendment 1. Allow for the obligations, liabilities and services described therein against the

following headings and make due allowance for complying with same within schedule of rates adjustment percentage:

RECITALS First – THE CONTRACT AREA

Within a thirty mile radius of Bury St. Edmunds.

Fourth – CDM COORDINATOR CDM Coordinator: Delete clause.

ARTICLES 3 - CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR

Contract Administrator: See clause A10/140.

4 –PRINCIPAL DESIGNER Principal Designer: See clause A10/150.

5 – PRINCIPAL CONTRACTOR Principal Contractor: See clause A10/130

8 – LEGAL PROCEEDINGS

Amendments: None.

9 – AMENDMENT 1: CDM REGULATIONS INCORPORATION This Agreement and the Conditions shall have effect as modified by the amendments set out in the attached Amendment 1: CDM Regulations.

Page 105: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/5 preliminaries/general conditions

CONTRACT PARTICULARS 1. Properties and description of the types of work (First Recital)

.1 List of properties in the Contract Area in respect of which Orders may be issued.

All properties defined in clause A12/100. .2 Description of the types of work for which Orders may be issued.

As defined within the Schedule of Rates. 2. Supplemental Provisions (Sixth Recital and Schedule) Supplemental Provisions (Where neither entry against an item below is deleted,

the relevant paragraph applies).

Collaborative working Paragraph I applies Health and safety Paragraph 2 applies Cost savings and value improvements Paragraph 3 applies Sustainable development and environmental considerations

Paragraph 4 applies

Performance indicators and monitoring Paragraph 5 applies Notification and negotiation of disputes Paragraph 6 applies Where paragraph 6 applies, the respective nominees of the Parties are

Employer’s nominee: Contract Administrator named in clause A10/140.

Contractor’s nominee: or such replacement as each Party

may notify to the other from time to time

3. Contract Period (Article 1 and clause 7.1) Subject to clause 7.1, the Contract Period will be for 3 years commencing on 1st

April 2016. The Contract may be extended by up to a further 2 years on a year by year basis, subject to provisions contained within the Contract for earlier termination and continued satisfactory performance reviews, by mutual agreement with the Contractor.

Page 106: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/6 preliminaries/general conditions

4. Arbitration (Article 7) Article 7 and clauses 9.3 to 9.8 (Arbitration) apply. 5. Orders - minimum and maximum value (Clause 2.4) Minimum value of any one Order to be issued. £75.00 (Seventy Five Pounds) Maximum value of any one Order to be issued. £130,000.00 (One Hundred and Thirty Thousand Pounds) 6. Orders – value of work to be carried out (Clause 2.5) Approximate anticipated value of work to be carried out under this Contract. £1,900,000.00 (One Million, Nine Hundred Thousand Pounds) per annum. 7. Orders - priority coding (Clause 2.6)

All individual Orders will state a commencement and completion date and also indicate priority coding (when applicable).

8. Construction Industry Scheme (C.I.S) (Clause 4.2)

The Employer at the commencement of the Contract Period is “Contractor” for the purposes of the CIS.

9. Progress payments (Clause 4.3.1)

The contractor may at intervals of not less than one month from the commencement date make an application to the Contact Administrator for a progress payment of the amount he considers will become due at the due date for completed works carried out pursuant to the Order up to a date (specified in the application) that is not more than seven days before the date of the application, after taking into account any amounts previously certified.

The value of materials and goods not incorporated into the works (stored on site and/or off site) and works partially complete pursuant to the Order, shall not be included in any progress payment.

10. Responsibility for measurement and valuation (Clause 5.2)

The Contractor shall measure and value all Orders.

Page 107: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/7 preliminaries/general conditions

11. Schedule of Rates (Clause 5.3, 5.6.1 and 5.6.2)

.1 The Schedule of Rates is:

The Kitchen and Bathroom Schedule of Rates forming part of these documents. subject to adjustment of the rates listed in that schedule by the addition/deduction of the Adjustment Percentage, which is ……………….. %.

.2 Where the Schedule of Rates is The National Schedule of Rates the version(s) identified are to apply.

Delete all versions. .3 Rates – Fluctuations

Clause 5.6.1 applies.

.4 Basis and dates for revision

Where clause 5.6.1 applies, the basis on which the Schedule of Rates is to be revised under clause 5.6.1.2 is as follows: The rates as stated in the schedule of rates are fixed for the first year of the Contract Period and shall subject to an annual review as indicated below. Any price fluctuation to the rates will be agreed by open book negotiation subject to a maximum increase equivalent to the percentage movement in the Retail Price Index (RPI) prepared by the Office of National Statistics. The base date for this calculation will be February 2016. The first annual review will be calculated on the indices published for February 2017 and subsequent annual reviews will be based on those indices published for each February. The dates as at which the Schedule of Rates is to be revised are the 1st April in each year following the review.

Page 108: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/8 preliminaries/general conditions

12. Daywork (Clauses 5.4, 5.6.3 and 5.6.4)

.1 Valuation – percentage additions

Where not included in or annexed to the Schedule of Hourly Charges, the percentage additions to the invoice price of non-labour items are as follows:

Overheads and profit on Materials ....……….%

Overheads and profit on Plant, Services and Consumable Stores …..……….%

Overheads and profit on Sub-Contractors ……..…….%

.2 Revision of Schedule of Hourly Charges

Clause 5.6.3 applies. Where Clause 5.6.3 applies the annual revision date (if other than 1 August) is the 1st April in each year following the review. Where clause 5.6.3 applies, the basis of revision of hourly charges, if not set out in the Schedule of Hourly Charges is as follows: The rates as stated in the schedule of hourly charges are fixed for the first year of the Contract Period and shall subject to an annual review as indicated below. Any price fluctuation to the rates will be agreed by open book negotiation subject to a maximum increase equivalent to the movement in the Retail Price Index (RPI) prepared by the Office of National Statistics. The base date for this calculation will be February 2016. The first annual review will be calculated on the indices published for February 2017 and subsequent annual reviews will be based on those indices published for each February.

13. Overtime work (Clauses 5.7)

The percentage addition in respect of overheads and profit on non-productive overtime rates is .……….%

14. Insurance (Clauses 6.4.1.2, 6.9, 6.11 and 6.14)

.1 Insurance cover for any one occurrence or series of occurrences arising out of one event £10,000,000.00

.2 Percentage to cover professional fees. 15%

.3 Annual renewal date of insurance as supplied by the Contractor (to be confirmed) .………………………………………………

.4 Terrorism Cover – details of required cover Not required

Page 109: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/9 preliminaries/general conditions

15. Break Provisions – Employer or Contractor (Clause 7.1) The period of notice is 26 weeks. 16. Settlement of Disputes (Clauses 9.2, 9.3 and 9.4.1)

Adjudication

The Adjudicator is ____________________________

Nominator of Adjudicator – where no Adjudicator is named or where the named Adjudicator is unwilling or unable to act (whenever that is established): The President or a Vice-President or Chairman or Vice Chairman of the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors.

Arbitration Appointer of Arbitrator (and of any replacement): The President or a Vice-President or Chairman or Vice Chairman of the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors.

THE CONDITIONS

SECTION 1: DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

1.4 Reckoning periods of days

Amendments: None

1.7 Applicable law Amendments: None

SECTION 2: CARRYING OUT WORK 2.12 Delete the word ‘6 months’ from line one and insert ’12 months’.

Page 110: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/10 preliminaries/general conditions

SECTION 3: CONTROL OF WORK 3.4.1 Delete existing text and insert the following:

The Contractor will be required to make his own arrangements with tenants regarding suitable times for entry and no claims will be considered by the CA with regard to abortive calls and execution of the work in occupied properties.

3.4.2 Delete existing text and insert the following: Vacant (void) properties will normally be fitted with a key safe (by Employer) before the Contractor commences any work to property. The Contractor will need to contact the CA to obtain access codes to safe or keys to property. Keys are to be returned to key safe once access to property has been achieved. Do not remove keys from property safe during the day or overnight. The Contractor will be responsible for the safe keeping of all keys and will be liable for the cost of replacing locks if keys are lost or damaged.

3.4.3 Delete existing text and insert the following: The Contractor shall be deemed to have acquainted himself with all conditions likely to affect the execution of the works including access, safety and other regulations in force on the properties and any requirements of the Local Authorities and Public Utilities. No claim by the Contractor for additional payment shall be allowed on the grounds of any misunderstanding or misinterpretation due to lack of knowledge of these conditions, regulations or requirements.

SECTION 4: PAYMENT 4.3.1 Delete existing text and insert the following:

The contractor may at intervals of not less than one month from the commencement date make an application to the Contact Administrator for a progress payment of the amount he considers will become due at the due date for completed works carried out pursuant to the Order up to a date (specified in the application) that is not more than seven days before the date of the application, after taking into account any amounts previously certified. The value of materials and goods not incorporated into the works (stored on site and/or off site) and works partially complete pursuant to the Order, shall not be included in any progress payment.

4.3.4 A retention fund of 5% will be deducted from all progress payments up to

the Order Completion Date. Upon the issue of the completion certificate one moiety of the retention fund will be released and the balance upon completion of making good of any defects under clause 2.12.

SECTION 5: MEASURMENT AND VALUATION 5.7 Delete clause SECTION 6: INJURY, DAMAGE AND INSURANCE

SECTION 7: BREAK PROVISION – RIGHTS OF EACH PARTY

7.1 Break notice Delete the word ‘13 weeks’ from line two and insert ’26 weeks’.

Page 111: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/11 preliminaries/general conditions

SECTION 8: TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT, ETC.

SECTION 9: SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES.

950 EXECUTION The Contract: Will be executed as a deed.

995 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT

The Contractor and the Employer agree that on cessation for whatever reason, in part or in whole, of this Contract or any Works or any Orders pursuant to this Contract it is not intended that the Transfer of Undertakings (Protection of Employment) Regulations 2006 (the "Regulations") shall apply so as to transfer the employment contract of any employee of the Contractor [or any sub-contractor to the Contractor] to the Employer or any replacement contractor appointed by the Employer and the Contractor shall take [and shall procure that its sub-contractors shall take] all steps that are necessary to ensure that no such employees do so transfer to the Employer or any replacement contractor appointed by the Employer. The Contractor agrees to indemnify the Employer and any replacement contractor appointed by the Employer against all liabilities arising out of or suffered by the Employer or any replacement contractor appointed by the Employer with respect to any transfer or alleged transfer of employees of the Contractor [or its sub-contractors] or any obligation or alleged failure to meet obligations in relation to employees or their representatives pursuant to the Regulations including but not limited to liabilities relating to the termination or alleged termination of employment of such employee by the Employer or any replacement contractor appointed by the Employer. For the purposes of these provisions “Liabilities” shall mean all claims, damages, costs (including all legal fees and expenses), liabilities, losses or awards arising as a result of or incurred or suffered by the indemnified party.

Within seven days of receiving a written request from the Employer the Contractor will supply in writing to the Employer all relevant and necessary employee liability information under the TUPE regulations or any subsequent legislation. The Contractor acknowledges and accepts that the Employer may pass this information to third parties.

Page 112: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/12 preliminaries/general conditions

A30 TENDERING/SUBLETTING/SUPPLY MAIN CONTRACT TENDERING 115 SCOPE General: These conditions are supplementary to those stated on the Form of

Tender. 140 TENDER PROCEDURE General: In accordance with the procedure detailed in the invitation to tender. 148 TUPE (TRANSFER OF UNDERTAKINGS FOR THE PROTECTION OF EMPLOYEES) General: The requirements of the regulations will apply to the existing staff

employed by the incumbent service providers in relation to the Works to be performed by the successful tenderer under the Contract.

Information: Tenderers will be required to contact the current service providers indicated below to obtain confidential information on the existing directly employed full-time staff currently engaged to provide the service.

Contact for information: Name: Alan Seager Company: Seager Home Solutions Address: 1 Seager Court, Lady Lane Industrial Estate, Hadleigh, IP7 6RL Telephone: (01473) 824884 Fax:

Tenderers are advised to seek independent professional advice on the effects of TUPE on their tender. Successful tenderer: Will be expected to: Provide all necessary assistance to the Employer(s) to allow them to fulfil their

statutory duties to consult the existing staff and trade unions prior to commencement of the Contract.

Indemnify the Employer(s) against any exposure under TUPE and to provide comparable benefits to any transferred staff who are in a pension scheme at present.

165 TENDER SUBMISSION

General: Tenderers should seek to clarify any points of doubt as to the interpretation of any part of the contract documents with the Employer before submitting a Tender. Queries should be submitted in writing to Mr Steve Adams, The Havebury Housing Partnership by close of business on 12th January 2016.

Any such clarification shall be confirmed in writing and will be sent to all tenderers.

175 ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER Acceptance: No guarantee is offered that any tender will be recommended for

acceptance or be accepted, or that reasons for non acceptance will be given. Costs: No liability is accepted for any cost incurred in the preparation of any tender. Values of work: No guarantee is offered that the estimated minimum/maximum values of work ordered will be attained or will not be exceeded.

Page 113: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/13 preliminaries/general conditions

185 INSPECTION OF TENDER General: Whilst the Tender documents will be treated as private, they may be

made available for inspection by the Office of Fair Trading or any other Regulatory body.

192 PERIOD OF VALIDITY Period: After submission or lodgement, tenders must remain open for

consideration (unless previously withdrawn) for the period stated in The Form of Tender.

PRICING/SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS 200 SUBSTITUTION OF PRODUCTS

Kitchen units, worktops and associated accessories, excluding sink top and taps (specification clause N10/150): The Employer may consider products of different manufacture/range to those specified. Compliance: Substitutions must be to an equivalent performance/quality standard to be considered and/or accepted. Documentation: Submit relevant supporting information with Tender for assessment and verification. Form of Tender: Tenders are to complete and indicate the percentage addition or deduction against the schedule of rates items (KUNIT009- KUNIT017, KUNIT020- KUNIT026, KUNIT030- KUNIT034, KUNIT040- KUNIT046, KUNIT050- KUNIT054, KUNIT060- KUNIT067 and KUNIT070- KUNIT074).

245 TENDER DOCUMENTS Alterations: Do not alter or qualify the schedule of rates or other tender

documents without written consent. Tenders containing unauthorised alterations or qualifications may be rejected.

Submission: The completed tender documents are: To be returned in a plain envelope using the official label provided. The

envelope shall not bear any name or mark indicating the sender. To be sent by recorded delivery post or delivered by hand to the given address

(obtain a receipt when delivered by hand). No tender received after the date and time indicated, nor any tender returned or delivered to any address other than that stated on the official label provided, shall be considered.

Page 114: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/14 preliminaries/general conditions

435 SCHEDULE OF RATES General: The priced schedule of rates forming part of these documents subject to

any adjustment in accordance with Contract Particulars item 11.1 will be used to value works instructed by the Contract Administrator. Content: The rates as stated in the schedule of rates are fixed for the first year of the

contract period and shall be subject to an annual review as indicated below. Any price fluctuation to the rates will be agreed by open book negotiation subject to a maximum increase equivalent to the percentage movement in the Retail Price Index (RPI) prepared by the Office of National Statistics.

The base date for this calculation will be February 2016. The first annual review will be calculated on the indices published for February 2017 and subsequent annual reviews will be based on those indices published for each February. The results of the annual review will be implemented on the 1st April of the year following the review.

No adjustment will be made to the Schedule of Rates, other than for the annual review, for items which may be performed in disadvantageous circumstances as these must be regarded as being offset by other items which may be performed in advantageous circumstances. The rates generally apply to carrying out complete items of works and in some instances to a range of specifications.

The valuation of work for any item not covered in the schedule of rates will be made by applying the rate for the nearest equivalent item on a pro rata basis (derived rate). If it is not practical or reasonable to deduce rates or prices therefrom, the value shall be agreed between the CA and Contractor on a fair and reasonable basis. No addition to these rates will be paid unless the scope of the works is entirely different from the work ordered.

It is the Contractor’s responsibility to advise the CA before any work is put in hand if he considers that the scope of the works is entirely different from the works order as no variation from the rates or items stated in the works order will be entertained once the work has been put in hand.

The rates are deemed to include all labour, materials, transport, plant and access equipment, abortive calls, profit and overhead charges and all costs in connection with complying with the relevant preliminaries and preambles.

Page 115: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/15 preliminaries/general conditions

460 TENDER EVALUATION Process: Tender evaluation will consist of a two stage process indicated below,

using a standard scoring model which will assess a combination of quality and cost issues in accordance with the following overall weighting: Quality 40% Cost 60% First stage (quality assessment): Following tender submission, tenderers will be invited to give a presentation to the Employers Assessment Panel followed by a question and answer session to: demonstrate service providers understanding of the contract requirements. explain service provider proposals for managing the contract. Indicate how service provider might be able to add value to or improve on the

standard of service provided. Presentation: Will be held at Havebury House, Bury St Edmunds on 10th/11th February 2016. Time of presentation will confirmed at a later date after tender submission. Second stage (cost assessment): Evaluating the financial aspects of the tender submission which will specifically consider the tendered rates and other on costs.

Tenderers will be given details of any obvious arithmetical errors or errors in computation discovered in the priced tender document(s) and afforded the opportunity of confirming, amending or withdrawing their offer. The lowest tendered cost will achieve the highest evaluation score. Award: The tenderer achieving the best (highest) overall quality and cost evaluation score will be awarded the contract.

630 DOMESTIC SUBCONTRACTORS

List: Provide details of all subcontractors and the work for which they will be responsible. Submit: Fifteen working days before the date for commencement of the work.

A31 PROVISION, CONTENT AND USE OF DOCUMENTS

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 110 DEFINITIONS Meaning: Terms, derived terms and synonyms used in the preliminaries/general

conditions and specification are as stated therein or in the appropriate British Standard or British Standard glossary.

120 COMMUNICATION

Definition: Includes advise, inform, submit, give notice, instruct, agree, confirm, seek or obtain information, consent or instructions, or make arrangements. Format: In writing to the person named in clause A10/140 unless specified otherwise. Response: Do not proceed until response has been received.

Page 116: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/16 preliminaries/general conditions

130 PRODUCTS Definition: Materials, both manufactured and naturally occurring, and goods, including components, equipment and accessories, intended for the permanent incorporation in the Works. Includes: Goods, plant, materials, site materials and things for incorporation into the Works.

135 SITE EQUIPMENT

Definition: All appliances or things of whatsoever nature required in or about the construction for completion of the Works but not materials or other things intended to form or forming part of the Permanent Works. Includes: Construction appliances, vehicles, consumables, tools, temporary works, scaffolding, cabins and other site facilities.

160 TERMS USED IN SPECIFICATION

Remove: Disconnect, dismantle as necessary and take out the designated products or work and associated accessories, fastenings, supports, linings and bedding materials. Dispose of unwanted materials. Excludes taking out and disposing of associated pipework, wiring, ductwork or other services. Fix: Unload, handle, store, place and fasten in position including all labours and use of site equipment. Supply and fix: Includes all labour and site equipment for unloading, handling, storing and execution. All products to be supplied and fixed unless stated otherwise. Keep for reuse: Do not damage designated products or work. Clean off bedding and jointing materials. Stack neatly, adequately protect and store until required by the Employer or for use in the Works as instructed. Make good: Execute local remedial work to designated work. Make secure, sound and neat. Excludes redecoration and/or replacement. Replace: Supply and fix new products matching those removed. Execute work to match original new state of that removed. Repair: Execute remedial work to designated products. Make secure, sound and neat. Excludes redecoration and/or replacement. Refix: Fix removed products. Ease: Adjust moving parts of designated products or work to achieve free movement and good fit in open and closed positions. Match existing: Provide products and work of the same appearance and features as the original, excluding ageing and weathering. Make joints between existing and new work as inconspicuous as possible. System: Equipment, accessories, controls, supports and ancillary items, including installation, necessary for that section of the work to function.

170 MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT REFERENCE Definition: When used in this combination: Manufacturer: The firm under whose name the particular product is marketed. Product reference: The proprietary brand name and/ or reference by which the

particular product is identified. Currency: References are to the particular product as specified in the manufacture’s technical literature current on the date of the invitation to tender.

Page 117: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/17 preliminaries/general conditions

200 SUBSTITUTION OF PRODUCTS

Products: If an alternative product to that specified is proposed, obtain approval before ordering the product.

Reasons: Submit reasons for the proposed substitution. Documentation: Submit relevant information, including:

manufacturer and product reference; cost; availability; relevant standards; performance; function; compatibility of accessories; proposed revisions to drawings and specification; compatibility with adjacent work; appearance; copy of warranty/guarantee.

Alterations to adjacent work: If needed, advise scope, nature and cost. Manufacturers’ guarantees: If substitution is accepted, submit before ordering

products. 220 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS Conflicts: Specification prevails over referenced documents. 240 SUBSTITUTION OF STANDARDS

Products specified to British Standard or European Standard: Substitution may be proposed of products complying with a grade or category within a national standard of another Member State of the European Community or an international standard recognised in the UK. Before ordering: Submit notification of all such proposals.

Documentary evidence: Submit for verification when requested as detailed in clause A31/200. Any submitted foreign language documents must be accompanied by certified translations into English.

250 CURRENCY OF DOCUMENTS Currency: References to published documents are to the editions, including

amendments and revisions, current on the date of the Invitation to tender. 255 SIZES General: Unless otherwise stated all products are specified by their co-ordinating

sizes. 295 SUPPLY AND FIX General: Unless otherwise stated all items specified in the schedule of rates are to

be supplied and fixed complete.

Page 118: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/18 preliminaries/general conditions

400 DATA PROTECTION

Information: Contractor’s shall treat all information received from the Employer as private and confidential, and must not knowingly use or pass on this information gained during the contract period either on their own behalf or to a third party. This restriction will remain binding after the end of the contract. Requirement: Comply with the provisions of the Data Protection Act 1998 and indemnify the Employer against all actions, costs, expenses, claims, proceedings and demands which may be made or brought against the Employer for any breach of statutory duty under the Act which arises from the use, disclosure or transfer of personal data by the Contractor and his servants or agents. Data Protection Risk Assessment Pro-forma (included in Appendix D): Submit completed copy to CA at least fifteen working days before the contract commencement date stated in the Contract Particulars.

DOCUMENTS PROVIDED ON BEHALF OF EMPLOYER 415 ADDITIONAL COPIES OF THE DOCUMENTS Copies: Two of each contract document will be issued free of charge (not counting

any certified copies). Additional copies: Issued on request and charged to the Contractor.

460 THE SPECIFICATION Coordination: All sections must be read in conjunction with Main Contract

Preliminaries/General conditions. 470 DIVERGENCE FROM THE STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS Divergence: Between the specification and the requirements of the Building

Regulations, other Statutes, statutory undertakers and other regulatory authorities.

Action: Inform immediately. 490 ASBESTOS DATABASE Information: Asbestos survey information for each property will be available to

view via the asbestos management system (TEAMS) web portal. Access: Each contractor will be issued with a unique password and a user guide

(under separate e-mail) following receipt of tender documents. Queries: Should be submitted (in writing) to Lucy Peek, Asbestos Administrator,

Havebury Housing Partnership, by the date stated in clause A30/165. Telephone: (01284) 722064. E-mail: [email protected]

DOCUMENTS PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR/ SUBCONTRACTORS/ SUPPLIERS 500 DISCLOSURE AND BARRING SERVICE (DBS)

Requirement: The Contractor shall ensure that a Standard DBS Check is carried out on all employees (or any employee of a sub-contractor) involved in the provision of the Works/Services. Information: DBS Check shall be completed as soon as possible and results notified to the CA before any work commences on site.

Page 119: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/19 preliminaries/general conditions

505 EMPLOYEE PROFILING

Information: Provide employee profiling data (example employee profiling form included in Appendix E). Submission: One legible copy to CA at least ten working days before the contract commencement date stated in the Contract Particulars and thereafter each August for the term of the contract.

625 WASTE MANAGEMENT

Information: Supply as necessary, including: Types and quantities of waste that will be generated. Resource management options for these wastes including proposals for

minimization/reuse/recycling. The use of appropriate and licensed waste management contractors. Record keeping procedures. Waste auditing protocols. Submit: Every three months for the term of the contract, at least five working days before the agreed review meeting date.

630 TECHNICAL LITERATURE Information: Keep on site for reference by all supervisory personnel: Manufacturers' current literature relating to all products to be used in the

Works. Relevant British, EN or ISO Standards.

640 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AND GUARANTEES

Components and equipment: Obtain or retain copies, register with manufacturer and hand over on or before completion of the Works. Emergency call out services: Provide telephone numbers for use after Completion.

730 THE HEALTH AND SAFETY FILE

Responsibility: To be produced by the Contractor. General: Obtain and provide technical literature for materials and products used in the works and maintenance procedures for all installations. Submission: One electronic copy to the Principal Designer at least three weeks before the date for completion of the works stated in the contract.

735 STATEMENT OF CLEANLINESS

Information: Provide on completion of non-licensed and notifiable of non-licensed work to each property where asbestos containing materials have been removed.

The written statement should include: The site address. The date of the work. A brief description of the work carried out. The name and address of the contractor. Details of the specific areas and items visually checked. A statement stating that the area has been thoroughly cleaned and visually

inspected to make sure that no visible traces of dust or debris remain and the area is suitable for reoccupation.

The name and signature of the person completing the inspection. Submission: One legible electronic copy to the CA. Practical completion of the works will not be achieved until receipt of document.

Page 120: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/20 preliminaries/general conditions

740 AIR SAMPLING REPORT Information: Provide on completion of licensed work to each property where asbestos containing materials have been removed.

Submission: One legible electronic copy to the CA. Practical completion of the works will not be achieved until receipt of document.

745 WASTE TRANSFER/CONSIGNMENT NOTES

Information: Provide with associated statement of cleanliness or air sampling report where asbestos containing materials have been removed and disposed of off-site. Submission: One legible electronic copy to the CA. Practical completion of the works will not be achieved until receipt of document.

A32 MANAGEMENT OF THE WORKS GENERALLY 100 EQUALITY AND DIVERSITY Requirement: Comply in all respects with the duties and responsibilities falling

upon the Contractor (and all subcontractors employed by the Contractor in relation to the said contract works) within the provisions of The Equality Act 2010.

102 CUSTOMER CARE Requirement: Comply in all respects with the duties and responsibilities falling

upon the Contractor (and upon any Sub-Contractor employed by the Contractor in relation to the said Contract Works) and perform the Services/Works in accordance with Havebury Housing Partnership’s ‘Customer Care Policy HS004A (copy included with the tender documents). Compliance: Will be monitored throughout the contract period via a variety of appropriate methods, including customer complaints, telephone surveys, mystery shopping surveys and customer satisfaction surveys.

106 TRAINING INITIATIVE Requirement: It is a contract condition that the Contractor employs a minimum of two apprentices on this project for the duration of the Contract.

Information: Within four weeks of the commencement of the Contract the contractor shall provide and confirm the following: name of apprentices to be employed details of apprentices discipline, work experience, training and qualifications.

Page 121: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/21 preliminaries/general conditions

110 CONTRACTORS EMPLOYEES Requirement: The Contractor shall at all times during the Contract period employ

or cause to be employed only such persons in and about the performance of the Contract as are properly and sufficiently qualified, competent, honest, experienced, instructed and supervised as necessary and appropriate for the proper performance of the Works.

A copy of each employees training log should be submitted before commencement of the Contract or during the Contract when recruiting new employees

- The Contractor shall ensure that sufficient numbers of persons are employed for the proper performance of the Works and that a sufficient reserve of employees is at all times available to fully perform the Works not withstanding staff holidays or absence through sickness or otherwise.

- The Contractor shall use their best endeavours to ensure that a minimum of 10% of the workforce involved in the provision of the Services are ‘Local Residents’ within the Contract Area (local defined to be within a thirty mile radius of Bury St. Edmunds).

- The CA may for any reason instruct the Contractor to remove any employee from the Works or to discipline any employee (which for the avoidance of doubt shall include the Contracts Manager or his representative) of the Contractor specified by notice in writing who in the opinion of the CA misconducts himself or is incompetent or negligent in the performance of his duties or who fails to conform with the relevant safety or Customer Care provisions. The contractor shall forthwith comply with such instructions. The Employer shall not in any circumstances be liable to the Contractor or any of its’ employees in relation to any liability, loss or damage arising out of any such disciplinary action or removal and the Contractor shall full and properly indemnify the Employer in respect of any claims brought by any such employee arising there from.

Contracts Manager: Inform CA of the name, address and telephone number of the Contracts Manager prior to commencement of the Works. The Contracts Manager will be required to provide all necessary superintendence, attend site meetings and consultation with the CA.

- The Contractor’s general foreman shall be present on the site at all times during working hours.

- Identification card: All personnel employed upon the works shall be supplied with an identification card (in a form approved by the CA), which will contain the following details: photograph of operative operative’s name Contractors name, logo, address and telephone number expiry date of card Uniform: The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel employed upon the works are at all times properly and presentably dressed in a uniform or clothing approved by the CA prior to commencement of the Works. Valuable items: All monies or other items of value found by the Contractor’s employees at any property shall be handed to the CA as soon as possible and a receipt obtained.

Page 122: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/22 preliminaries/general conditions

111 SUPERVISION General: Accept responsibility for co-ordination, supervision and administration of

the Works, including subcontracts. Coordination: Arrange and monitor a programme with each subcontractor,

supplier, local authority and statutory undertaker, and obtain and supply information as necessary for co-ordination of the work.

112 COMPLAINTS Requirement: The Contractor shall have a proceedure in place to deal with any

complaints received verbally or in writing from tenants, leaseholders or other indviduals, in a prompt, courteous and efficient manner.

All complaints shall be brought to the attention of the Contract Administrator

within 24 hours of receipt.

Unresolved complaints: Received or referred to the Employer will be investigated

by the Contract Administrator. The Contract Administrator will advise the

Contractor what remedial work if any, is to be carried out as a result of the

complaint and/or any compenstaion payment to be made.

Log: The Contractor shall keep a written record of all complaints received and the

log shall include:

The nature of the complaint and whether it was in writing or otherwise

The date the complaint came to the attention of the Contractor

The action taken to resolve the complaint

The date the complaint was resolved

The date the complainant was notified of the resolution of the complaint.

Such records shall be kept available for inspection by the Contract Administrator

at all reasonable times.

114 COMPENSATION Requirement: When a tenant, leaseholder or other individual has suffered

inconvenience, distress or financial loss as a direct result of an action or service failure by the Contractor (and subcontractors employed by the Contractor in relation to the said contract works), the Contractor will be expected to pay appropriate compensation in acccordance with Havebury Housing Partnership’s ‘Compenation Policy HS012’ (copy included with the tender documents).

Where appropriate the Employer may at its discretion choose to pay the

compensation and recover the costs from the Contractor by way of a deduction

from amounts payable by the Employer to the Contractor under the terms of the

Contract. 118 OFFICE Requirement: The Contractor shall maintain an office manned at all times

between the hours of 08.00 to 17.30 Monday to Friday. He should also make adequate arrangements to receive emergency calls outside normal working hours.

120 INSURANCE Documentary evidence: Submit details before starting work on site and/or policies

and receipts for the insurance required by the Conditions of Contract.

Page 123: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/23 preliminaries/general conditions

130 INSURANCE CLAIMS Notice: If any event occurs which may give rise to any claim or proceeding in

respect of loss or damage to the Works or injury or damage to persons or property arising out of the Works, immediately give notice to the Employer, Contract Administrator and the Insurers.

Failure to notify: Indemnify the Employer against any loss, which may be caused by failure to give such notice.

150 OWNERSHIP Alteration/clearance work: Materials arising become the property of the

Contractor except where otherwise stated. Remove from site as work proceeds. PROGRAMME/PROGRESS 200 WORKS ORDERS General: Properties requiring work will be identified in groups (but not necessarily

in close proximity to each other) or on an individual basis as the contract progresses and a Works Order issued in the form of a Contract Administrators’ instruction, at any time within the Contract period.

Survey and design of kitchen/bathroom: The Contractor will be required to survey each property to determine the scope of the works and assume design responsibility for the new kitchen and/or bathroom installation and associated works. A copy of the outline design indicating tenant’s choice of colour for units/worktop, wall/floor tiling is to be signed by the tenant and left at property with tenant.

The new kitchen layout should provide storage not less than that currently provided and to meet the essential standards of the National Housing Federation where possible. Failure to meet the above requirements should be notified to the CA.

Design of bathroom adaptations: The Contractor will be required to survey each property to determine the scope of the works and assume design responsibility for the new installation and associated works. A copy of the outline design indicating tenant’s choice of wall decoration and colour of floor covering is to be signed by the tenant and left at property with tenant.

Works Orders: Will be measured and valued by the Contractor for each property from the

attached schedule of rates and submitted with the outline design to the CA before commencing any work on property.

Will state a commencement date and completion date. All variations to an Order will be confirmed in writing by the CA.

Priority orders: Where issued for a vacant property (void) the work must be commenced and completed within the specified period. Failure to comply with a completion date to a vacant property will result in any rent loss being recharge to the contractor.

The Employer reserves the right to place orders for similar work with other Contractors or his own labour within the Contract Area.

Page 124: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/24 preliminaries/general conditions

215 PROGRAMME Programme: Immediately when requested and before starting work on site submit

in an approved form a programme for the Works. Any changes to the agreed programme should be notified to the CA and tenant as soon as possible.

Requirement: Submit to the CA at the beginning of each week a list of commencements and completions.

225 MONITORING

Key Performance Indicators: The CA shall monitor and assess the Contractor’s performance by reference to the following performance indicators:

Works completed on time.

Defects at handover.

Customer satisfaction. The Contractor shall provide to the CA all information that he may reasonably require to monitor and assess the Contractor’s performance against the targets for those performance indicators.

If performance against any KPI falls short of target, submit proposals for remediation.

255 NOTIFICATION OF COMPENSATION EVENT

Content: Notwithstanding the Contractor's obligations under the Contract written notice must also be given of all other causes which apply concurrently.

265 PROGRESS MEETINGS: General: Meetings will be held to review progress and other matters arising from

the administration of the Contract. Frequency: Monthly. Location: Employers accommodation. Attendees: Attend meetings and inform subcontractors and suppliers when their

presence is required. Chairperson (who will also take and distribute minutes): CA. Contractor’s Report: Submit to the CA (at least five working days before the

agreed meeting date) and confirm the following information for discussion: Properties completed/remaining to complete to date. Properties where no access has been gained. Information/instructions required. Reported incidents and accidents. Any changes to contractors or sub-contractors operatives. Complements and complaints received from residents, leaseholders or

members of the public. Claims. All other required Key Performance Indicator (KPI) information.

Page 125: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/25 preliminaries/general conditions

CONTROL OF COST 465 PROGRESS PAYMENT Applications: Include details of amounts requested under the Contract together

with all necessary supporting information including consignment notes and air sampling reports.

Format: Agree format of application with the CA before submission. Submission: At intervals of not less than one month from the commencement date

stated in the Contract Particulars.

472 PRODUCTS NOT INCORPORATED INTO THE WORKS General: The value of materials and goods not incorporated into the Works (stored on site and/or off site) will not be included in any progress payment application.

A33 QUALITY STANDARDS/CONTROL STANDARDS OR PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION 110 INCOMPLETE DOCUMENTATION General: Where and to the extent that products or work are not fully

documented, they are to be: Of a kind and standard appropriate to the nature and character of that part of

the Works where they will be used. Suitable for the purposes stated or reasonably to be inferred from the project

documents. Contract documents: Omissions or errors in description and/or quantity shall not

vitiate the Contract nor release the Contractor from any obligations or liabilities under the Contract.

120 WORKMANSHIP SKILLS

Operatives: Appropriately skilled and experienced for the type and quality of work. Registration: With Construction Skills Certification Scheme. Evidence: Operatives must produce evidence of skills/qualifications when requested.

130 QUALITY OF PRODUCTS Generally: New. (Proposals for recycled products may be considered).

Supply of each product: From the same source or manufacturer. Whole quantity of each product required to complete the Works: Consistent in kind, size, quality and overall appearance. Tolerances: Where critical, measure a sufficient quantity to determine compliance. Deterioration: Prevent. Order in suitable quantities to a programme and use in appropriate sequence.

Page 126: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/26 preliminaries/general conditions

135 QUALITY OF EXECUTION Generally: Fix, apply, install or lay products securely, accurately, plumb, neatly and in alignment. Colour batching: Do not use different colour batches where they can be seen together. Dimensions: Check on-site dimensions. Finished work: Without defects, e.g. not damaged, disfigured, dirty, faulty, or out of tolerance. Location and fixing of products: Adjust joints open to view so they are even and regular.

140 COMPLIANCE

Compliance with proprietary specifications: Retain evidence that the proprietary product specified has been supplied. Compliance with performance specifications: Submit evidence of compliance, including test reports indicating: Properties tested. Pass/fail criteria. Test methods and procedures. Test results. Identity of testing agency. Test dates and times. Identities of witnesses. Analysis of results.

145 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS General: Comply with the Control of Asbestos Regulations 2012. Removal: All asbestos containing materials to be encapsulated before removal, double bagged, clearly labelled and correctly stored whilst awaiting collection. Disposal: Contractor must be registered to transport asbestos waste under the Special Waste Regulations 1996 and the Environmental Protection Act 1990.

150 INSPECTIONS

Products and executions: Inspection or any other action must not be taken as approval unless confirmed in writing referring to: Date of inspection. Part of the work inspected. Respects or characteristics which are approved. Extent and purpose of the approval. Any associated conditions.

160 RELATED WORK Details: Provide all trades with necessary details of related types of work. Before starting each new type or section of work ensure previous related work is: Appropriately complete. In accordance with the project documents. To a suitable standard. In a suitable condition to receive the new work. Preparatory work: Ensure all necessary preparatory work has been carried out.

Page 127: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/27 preliminaries/general conditions

170 MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS/INSTRUCTIONS General: Comply with manufacturer's printed recommendations and instructions current on the date of the Invitation to tender. Changes to recommendations or instructions: Submit details. Ancillary products and accessories: Use those supplied or recommended by main product manufacturer. Agrément certified products: Comply with limitations, recommendations and requirements of relevant valid certificates.

180 WATER FOR THE WORKS

Mains supply: Clean and uncontaminated. Other: Do not use until: Evidence of suitability is provided. Tested to BS EN 1008 if instructed.

SAMPLES/APPROVALS 210 SAMPLES

Products or executions: Comply with all other specification requirements and in respect of the stated or implied characteristics either: To an express approval. To match a sample expressly approved as a standard for the purpose.

220 APPROVAL OF PRODUCTS

Submissions, samples, inspections and tests: Undertake or arrange to suit the Works programme. Approval: Relates to a sample of the product and not to the product as used in the Works. Do not confirm orders or use the product until approval of the sample has been obtained. Complying sample: Retain in good, clean condition on site. Remove when no longer required.

230 APPROVAL OF EXECUTION

Submissions, samples, inspections and tests: Undertake or arrange to suit the Works programme. Approval: Relates to the stated characteristics of the sample. (If approval of the finished work as a whole is required this is specified separately). Do not conceal, or proceed with affected work until compliance with requirements is confirmed. Complying sample: Retain in good, clean condition on site. Remove when no longer required.

255 AIR SAMPLING

Requirement: Carry out air clearance testing by a UKAS accredited laboratory on completion of removal of all asbestos containing material and before removing temporary enclosures. Compliance: Submit test results for each property.

Page 128: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/28 preliminaries/general conditions

ACCURACY/SETTING OUT GENERALLY 330 APPEARANCE AND FIT

Tolerances and dimensions: If likely to be critical to execution or difficult to achieve, as early as possible either: Submit proposals; or Arrange for inspection of appearance of relevant aspects of partially finished

work. General tolerances (maximum): To BS 5606, tables 1 and 2.

SERVICES GENERALLY 410 SERVICES REGULATIONS New or existing services: Comply with the Bye Laws or Regulations of the relevant

Statutory Authority. 435 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CERTIFICATE

On completion of the work: Submit appropriate certificate. Original certificate: One legible electronic copy to Contract Administrator. Practical completion of the works will not be achieved until receipt of document.

445 SERVICE RUNS General: Provide adequate apace and support for services, including unobstructed

routes and fixings. SUPERVISION/INSPECTION/DEFECTIVE WORK 500 SUPERVISION General: In addition to the constant management and supervision of the works

provided by the Contractor's person in charge, all significant types of work must be under the close control of competent trade supervisors to ensure maintenance of satisfactory quality and progress. Replacement: Give maximum possible notice before changing the person in charge.

510 CO-ORDINATION OF ENGINEERING SERVICES Suitability: Site organisation staff must include one or more persons with

appropriate knowledge and experience of mechanical and electrical engineering services to ensure compatibility between engineering and the Works generally. Evidence: Submit when requested, CVs or other documentary evidence relating to the staff concerned.

540 DEFECTS IN EXISTING WORK

Undocumented defects: When discovered, immediately give notice. Do not proceed with affected related work until response has been received. Documented remedial work: Do not execute work which may: Hinder access to defective products or work; or Be rendered abortive by remedial work.

Page 129: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/29 preliminaries/general conditions

560 TIMING OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Timing: Agree and record dates and times of tests and inspections to enable the

CA and other affected parties to be represented. On the previous working day to each such test or inspection confirm that the work

or sample in question will be ready or, if not ready, agree a new date and time. Record: Submit a legible electronic copy of each test certificate to CA. 610 PROPOSALS FOR RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS/EXECUTION

Proposals: Immediately any execution or product is known, or appears, to be not in accordance with the Contract, submit proposals for opening up, inspection, testing, making good, adjustment of the Contract Sum, or removal and re-execution. Acceptability: Such proposals may be unacceptable and contrary instructions may be issued.

620 MEASURES TO ESTABLISH ACCEPTABILITY

General: Wherever inspection or testing shows that the work, materials or goods are not in accordance with the contract and measures (e.g. testing, opening up, experimental making good) are taken to help in establishing whether or not the work is acceptable, such measures: Will be at the expense of the Contractor. Will not be considered as grounds for extension of time.

635 QUALITY CONTROL Procedures: Establish and maintain to ensure that the Works, including the work of subcontractors, comply with specified requirements. Records: Maintain full records, keep copies on file for inspection. Content of records: Identification of the element, item, batch or lot including location in the Works. Nature and dates of inspections, tests and approvals. Nature and extent of nonconforming work found. Details of any corrective action.

WORK AT OR AFTER COMPLETION 710 WORK BEFORE COMPLETION General: Make good all damage consequent upon the work.

Temporary markings, coverings and protective wrappings: Remove unless otherwise instructed.

Cleaning: Clean the works thoroughly inside and out including all accessible ducts and voids. Remove all splashes, deposits, efflorescence, rubbish and surplus materials.

Cleaning materials and methods: As recommended by manufacturers of products being cleaned, and must not damage or disfigure other materials or construction.

COSHH dated data sheets: Obtain for all materials used for cleaning and ensure they are used only as recommended by their manufacturers.

Minor faults: Touch up in newly painted/repainted work, carefully matching colour, and brushing out edges. Repaint badly marked areas back to suitable breaks or junctions.

Moving parts of new work: Adjust, ease and lubricate as necessary to ensure easy and efficient operation, including doors, windows, drawers, ironmongery, appliances, valves and controls.

Page 130: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/30 preliminaries/general conditions

715 SECURITY AT COMPLETION – VACANT (VOID) PROPERTIES General: Leave the Works secure with all accesses closed and locked. Keys: To be returned to key safe. 724 OUTSTANDING ITEMS AT HANDOVER

Completion: All outstanding items identified at handover are to be completed within five

working days from the handover date. The contractor is to notify the CA when works have been completed.

Should the Contractor fail to complete outstanding items within the required period, the Employer reserves the right to arrange for such work to be carried out by others and the cost will be a charge against amounts owing to the Contractor.

726 DEFECTS ARISING DURING THE WORKS/RECTIFICATION PERIOD

Emergency call out services: Provide a list of names and their telephone numbers who can be contacted to deal with such work. General: The Employer will report defects to Contractor who must respond within the times given below: Emergency Repairs: Those repairs which are required to avoid danger to

health, a risk to safety of residents or serious damage to the property Requirement: Respond within 4 hours and repair carried out within 24 hours.

Non-Urgent Repairs: Those repairs not covered by the above which substantially affect the comfort or convenience of residents Requirement: To be carried out within 10 working days.

Should the Contractor fail to respond within the required times, the Employer reserves the right to arrange for such repairs to be carried out by others and the cost will be a charge against amounts owing to the Contractor

730 MAKING GOOD DEFECTS Remedial work: Arrange access with each tenant. Rectification: Give each tenant reasonable notice of the precise dates for access

to each property for purposes of making good defects. Completion: Notify CA when remedial works have been completed. 750 CUSTOMER SATISFACATION SURVEY General: A Customer Satisfaction survey will be undertaken by the Employer on

completion of the specified works. Results from the Survey will be taken forward into the Key Performance Indicator (KPI) results and the Contractor’s performance will be continually reviewed as per the KPI requirements under this Contract.

Requirement: To maintain a high level of customer satisfaction for all works associated with this Contract. Failure to achieve an acceptable level of satisfaction may result in the consideration of future orders being placed with other appropriate Contractors.

It is expected that 90% or more of tenants who complete the survey will express satisfaction with the service.

Page 131: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/31 preliminaries/general conditions

A34 SECURITY/SAFETY/PROTECTION SECURITY, HEALTH AND SAFETY 110 PRE-CONSTRUCTION INFORMATION - Location: Integral with the project preliminaries and general conditions, including

but not restricted to the following sections:

Description of project: Sections A10 and A11.

Client's consideration and management requirements: Sections A12, A13 and A36.

Environmental restrictions and on-site risks: Section A12, A35 and A34.

Significant design and construction hazards: Section A34.

The Health and Safety File: Section A31. 135 THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE PLAN Submission: Present to the Principal Designer not less than two weeks before the

proposed date for start of construction work. Confirmation: Do not start construction work until the Principal Designer has

confirmed in writing that the Construction Phase Plan includes the procedures and arrangements required by CDM Regulations.

Content: Develop the plan from the Preconstruction Information. 142 HSE APPROVED CODES OF PRACTICE Comply with the following:

Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations 1999. Managing Health and Safety in Construction.

148 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRATORS Requirement: Comply in all respects with the duties and responsibilities falling

upon the Contractor (and upon any Sub-Contractor employed by the Contractor in relation to the said Contract Works) as an employer in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Practice – Safety Requirements for Contractors adopted by The Havebury Housing Partnership and any other statutory regulations applicable thereto or any statutory modification or amendment of any of the provisions thereof.

Receipt of the Code of Practice: A standard form of acknowledgement will be included with the tender documents for all tenderers to sign and return with their form of tender.

150 SECURITY Protection: Adequately safeguard the site, the Works, products, materials and any

existing buildings affected by the Works from damage and theft. Access: Take all reasonable precautions to prevent unauthorised access to the

site, the Works and adjoining property. 155 POLICE REGULATIONS Requirement: Comply with all Police Regulations insofar as they affect the Works. 160 STABILITY Responsibility: Maintain the stability and structural integrity of the Works during

the Contract. Design loads: Obtain details, support as necessary and prevent overloading.

Page 132: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/32 preliminaries/general conditions

165 OCCUPIED PREMISES Extent: The majority of properties will be occupied and/or used for the duration

of the Contract works. Occupants may vary from the elderly and disabled to families with very young children.

Works: Carry out the Works without undue inconvenience and nuisance and without danger to occupants and users.

Facilities: Ensure that occupants of each property have the following facilities available at the end of each working day: lighting heating power drinking water sanitation services washing and cooking facilities.

PROTECT AGAINST THE FOLLOWING 310 EXPLOSIVES Use: Not permitted. 330 NOISE CONTROL Standard: Comply generally with the recommendations of BS 5228: Part 1, clause

9.3 to minimise noise levels during the execution of the works. Equipment: Fit compressors, percussion tools and vehicles with effective silencers

of a type recommended by manufacturers of the compressors, tools or vehicles. Restrictions: Do not use:

Radios or other audio equipment or permit employees to use in ways or at times which may cause nuisance.

350 PESTICIDES Use: Not permitted 360 NUISANCE Duty: Prevent nuisance from smoke, dust, rubbish, vermin and other causes. 365 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS Duty: Report immediately any suspected materials not on issued database

discovered during execution of the work. Do not disturb. Agree methods for safe removal or encapsulation.

371 DANGEROUS OR HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

Duty: Report immediately suspected materials discovered during execution of the work. Do not disturb. Agree methods for safe removal or remediation.

380 FIRE PREVENTION Duty: Prevent personal injury or death, and damage to the Works or other

property from fire.

Page 133: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/33 preliminaries/general conditions

390 SMOKING ON SITE Smoking on site: Not permitted. 400 BURNING ON SITE Burning on site: Not permitted. 420 INFECTED TIMBER Removal: Where instructed to remove timber affected by fungal/insect attack

from the building minimise the risk of infecting other parts of the building. 425 WASTE Includes: Rubbish, debris, spoil, surplus material, containers and packaging. General:

Minimize production. Prevent accumulation Keep the garden, exterior and interior of properties clean and tidy at all times.

Handling: Collect and store in suitable containers. Remove frequently and disposal off site in a safe and competent manner: Non-hazardous material: In a manner approved by a Waste Regulation Authority. Hazardous material: As directed by the Waste Regulation Authority and in

accordance with relevant regulations. Recyclable material: Sort and dispose at a Materials Recycling Facility approved by the Waste Regulation Authority.

Waste transfer documentation: Retain on file. PROTECT THE FOLLOWING 510 EXISTING SERVICES

Confirmation: Notify all service authorities, statutory undertakers and/or adjacent owners of proposed works not less than one week before commencing site operations. Identification: Before starting work, check and mark positions of utilities/services. Where positions are not shown on drawings obtain relevant details from service authorities, statutory undertakers or other owners. Work adjacent to services: Comply with service authority's/statutory undertaker's recommendations. Adequately protect, and prevent damage to services: Do not interfere with their

operation without consent of service authorities/statutory undertakers or other owners.

Identifying services: Below ground: Use signboards, giving type and depth; Overhead: Use headroom markers. Damage to services: If any results from execution of the Works: Immediately give notice and notify appropriate service authority/ statutory

undertaker. Make arrangements for the work to be made good without delay to the

satisfaction of service authority/ statutory undertaker or other owner as appropriate.

Any measures taken to deal with an emergency will not affect the extent of the Contractor's liability.

Marker tapes or protective covers: Replace, if disturbed during site operations to service authority's statutory undertakers recommendations.

Page 134: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/34 preliminaries/general conditions

520 ROADS AND FOOTPATHS Duty: Maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site and keep clear

of mud and debris. Damage caused by site traffic or otherwise consequent upon the Works: Make

good to the satisfaction of the Employer, Local Authority or other owner. Bear any costs arising.

540 RETAINED TREES/HEDGES/SHRUBS/GRASSED AREAS Protection: Prevent damage and preserve, except those no required. Replacement: Mature trees and shrubs if uprooted, destroyed, or damaged beyond

reasonable chance of survival in their original shape, as a consequence of the Contractor's negligence, must be replaced with those of a similar type and age at the Contractor's expense.

560 EXISTING FEATURES Protection: Prevent damage to existing buildings, fences, gates, walls, roads,

paved areas and other site features which are to remain in position during the execution of the Works.

570 EXISTING WORK Protection: Prevent damage to existing work, structures or other property during

the course of the work. Removal: Minimum amount necessary. Replacement work: To match existing. 580 BUILDING INTERIORS Protection: Prevent damage from exposure to the environment including weather,

flora, fauna and other causes of material degradation during the course of alteration work.

590 EXISTING FURNITURE, FITTINGS AND EQUIPMENT Protection of furniture, fittings, carpets and the like: Prevent damage, move as

necessary to enable the Works to be executed and replace in original positions. Provide all necessary covers and dust sheets to protect tenants furniture, fittings

and floor coverings and remove on completion of the Work. 625 ADJOINING PROPERTY

Precautions: Prevent trespass of workpeople and take precautions to prevent damage to adjoining property. Permission: Obtain as necessary from the owners if requiring to erect scaffolding on or otherwise use adjoining property, and pay all charges. Remove and make good on completion or when directed. Damage: Bear the cost of repairing damage arising from execution of the Works.

Page 135: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/35 preliminaries/general conditions

630 EXISTING STRUCTURES Duty: Check proposed methods of work for effects on adjacent structures inside

and outside the site boundary. Supports: During execution of the Works:

Provide and maintain all incidental shoring, strutting, needling and other supports as may be necessary to preserve the stability of existing structures on the site or adjoining that may be endangered or affected by the Works.

Do not remove until new work is strong enough to support the existing structure. Prevent overstressing of completed work when removing supports.

Adjacent structures: Monitor and immediately report excessive movement. Standard: Comply with BS 5975 and BS EN 12812. A35 SPECIFIC LIMITATIONS ON METHOD/SEQUENCE/TIMING 130 METHOD/SEQUENCE OF WORK

Specific Limitations: Include the following in the programme: The contractor must allow pedestrian access to all properties at all times for

the duration of the Contract. The Contractor is to give each tenant or leaseholder a minimum of five days

notice of the actual date the work will be carried out. Should access not be gained on the appointed date to any dwellings, the Contractor is to notify the Contract Administrator in writing, giving details.

170 WORKING HOURS Specific Limitations: The Contractor will be restricted to working between the

hours of 08.00 to 17.30 Monday to Friday excluding Public Holidays. A36 FACILITIES/TEMPORARY WORK/SERVICES 110 SPOIL HEAPS, TEMPORARY WORKS AND SERVICES Location: Give notice of intended siting. Maintenance: Alter, adapt and move as necessary. Remove when no longer

required and make good. 115 SKIPS Located on highway: Apply to the relevant Local Authority for permission. If

permission is granted, the Contractor must ensure that the skip is positioned and used strictly in accordance with the Local Authorities conditions. Allow for all necessary watching and lighting.

Located on areas maintained by the Employer: Should the Contractor wish to deposit a skip on roads, paths, pavings, car parking areas, garage forecourts or grassed areas maintained by the Employer, obtain permission from the CA and ensure that the skip is positioned and used strictly in accordance with any specified conditions. Allow for all necessary watching and lighting.

Damage: Bear cost of repairing damage to pavings or grassed areas.

Page 136: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/36 preliminaries/general conditions

255 SANITARY ACCOMMODATION Facilities for transient sites: The Contractor is to ensure that his operatives obtain

permission from the tenant before using sanitary facilities. Should permission not be granted, operatives must find alternative facilities at the Contractor's expense. Facilities for vacant (void) properties: Operatives may use the sanitary facilities except during the winter months when the domestic hot and cold water supplies have been drained to prevent freezing.

325 TEMPORARY FENCING, HOARDINGS AND GANTRIES General cost items: Provide and maintain any temporary fencing, hoarding, fans,

planked footways, guard rails, gantries and the like for the proper execution of the work, for the protection of the public and the occupants of the adjoining premises and for meeting the requirements of any Local or other Authority. Alter and adapt as necessary, remove when no longer required and make good.

355 TEMPORARY WORKS

General cost items: Provide and maintain all temporary scaffolding and working platforms for the proper execution of the work. Alter and adapt as necessary, remove when no longer required and make good. Pay all associated costs relating to these works. Compliance: Requirements identified in Safety Requirements for Contractors document included with tender documents (see clause A34/148).

412 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER Supply: Provide all necessary temporary lighting and power for the Works, pay all

charges for electricity or other fuel consumed, clear away and make good on completion. Where practicable, the Contractor may use the tenant’s supply providing that no inconvenience is caused to the tenant and the Contractor makes full reimbursement promptly to the tenant.

Vacant (void) properties: Provide all necessary portable power sources, fuel, leads, lamps and fittings etc.

435 WATER

Supply: The mains supply to each property may be used by the Contractor. Metering: If applicable, readings will be taken at possession and completion of the works. Agree with the tenant the apportionment of costs and pay all costs relating to the works.

440 TELEPHONES Direct communication: As soon as practicable provide the Contractors person in

charge with a mobile telephone.

Page 137: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/37 preliminaries/general conditions

A55 DAYWORKS

100 DAYWORK CHARGES Calculation: In accordance with the Definition of Prime Cost of Daywork carried

out under a Building Contract published by the RICS/Construction Confederation current at the date of tender.

110 MATERIALS AND GOODS General: Cost of materials and goods shall be the invoiced cost delivered to site

excluding all trade discounts. Invoices shall be submitted to substantiate any claim.

112 PLANT CHARGES Where plant is hired: Cost of plant shall be the invoiced cost excluding all trade

discounts. Invoices shall be submitted to substantiate any claim. 114 PLANT CHARGES Where plant is not hired: Cost of plant shall be calculated in accordance with

Schedule of Basic Plant Charges published by the RICS current at the date of tender.

115 DAYWORK RATES

Requirement: The Contractor is to complete the schedule of hourly charges for operatives within the Form of Tender. The all-inclusive hourly rate(s) is deemed to include all incidental costs, overheads and profit. Overheads and profit (Contract Particulars item 12.1): The Contractor is to complete the percentage additions to the invoice price of non-labour items within the Form of Tender.

Revision of hourly charges: In accordance with Contract Particulars item 12.2.

Page 138: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

1/38 Appendices

APPENDICES

APPENDIX D - DATA PROTECTION RISK ASSESSMENT

APPENDIX E - EMPLOYEE PROFILE FORM

Page 139: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

DEMOLITIONS/ALTERATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

DEMOL001 Remove and dispose of half brick wall. To included all necessary cutting and all access

equipment. S.M. 4.70

DEMOL002 Remove and dispose of one brick wall. To included all necessary cutting and all access

equipment. S.M. 6.40

DEMOL003 Remove and dispose of block wall or partition not exceeding 150mm thick.

To included all necessary cutting and all access equipment. S.M. 4.70

DEMOL004 Remove and dispose of paramount wall or partition not exceeding 100mm thick.

To included all access equipment. S.M. 4.70

Remove and dispose of chimney stack above roof line, per course.

Access equipment included elsewhere.

DEMOL005 1 flue stack OCC. 6.00

DEMOL006 2 flue stack OCC. 10.55

DEMOL007 3 flue stack OCC. 11.00

DEMOL008 4 flue stack OCC. 11.50

DEMOL009 5 flue stack OCC. 11.95

DEMOL010 6 flue stack OCC. 14.65

DEMOL011 8 flue stack OCC. 17.40

Remove and dispose of projecting chimney breast (section of external wall only,

internal wall or partition to remain). To include cleaning off soot deposits and all

access equipment.

DEMOL012 337mm thick S.M. 27.10

DEMOL013 450mm thick S.M. 35.85

DEMOL014 562mm thick S.M. 44.65

DEMOL015 Remove and dispose of Rayburn cooker housing 1320mm long x 450mm deep x 2290mm

high. To include framework and panel to old hot water tank cupboard above cooker

recess, brick piers to sides of cooker recess and hot water tank cupboard, concrete slab

lintel, white glazed tiling to back wall of cooker recess, breaking up cooker plinth and all

access equipment. Remove external soot box and brick up opening to match existing. OCC. 275.55

DEMOL016 Fit tiling to match existing including treated softwood tiling battens and felt underlay in

areas not exceeding one square metre. Allow for adjusting existing tiling to perimeter

of aperture to ensure that new felt underlay overlaps existing by a minimum of 150mm.

Infill aperture where chimney breast has been removed with 50 x 200mm thick

treated sawn softwood rafters and ceiling joists including all necessary joist hangers.

Fit 50 x 100mm treated sawn softwood wall plate including all necessary straps.

Lay 250mm thick insulation quilt in two layers across new ceiling area. OCC. 175.30

3/1 schedule of rates

Page 140: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

DEMOLITIONS/ALTERATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

DEMOL017 Fit tongued and grooved flooring to match existing in areas not exceeding one square

metre. Infill aperture where chimney breast has been removed with 50mm thick

treated sawn softwood floor joists including all necessary joist hangers. OCC. 72.80

DEMOL018 Remove and dispose of door. OCC. 7.35

DEMOL019 Remove door, set aside and rehang. OCC. 14.05

DEMOL020 Remove door and rehang to open other way. To include all necessary alterations to

stop, latch and furniture, surface splice old hinges and keep position. OCC. 51.10

DEMOL021 Remove and dispose of door frame/lining (timber or steel) and architrave. OCC. 16.10

DEMOL022 Remove and dispose of architrave (one side of lining only). OCC. 3.60

DEMOL023 Remove and dispose of concrete/stone step. OCC. 9.75

DEMOL024 Remove and dispose of timber carpet threshold. OCC. 6.05

DEMOL025 Remove and dispose of timber or steel window including associated window board and

sub frame, up to one square metre in area. OCC. 25.05

DEMOL026 Remove and dispose of timber or steel window including associated window board and

sub frame, one to two square metres in area. OCC. 27.20

DEMOL027 Build half brick wall in common bricks filling existing opening.

To include all necessary wedging and pinning, cutting, toothing and bonding at jambs

and all access equipment. S.M. 73.00

DEMOL028 Build half brick wall in facing bricks to match existing filling existing opening.

To include all necessary wedging and pinning, cutting, toothing and bonding at jambs

and all access equipment. S.M. 80.90

DEMOL029 Build one brick wall in facing bricks to match existing filling existing opening.

To include all necessary wedging and pinning, cutting, toothing and bonding at jambs

and all access equipment. S.M. 144.45

DEMOL030 Build 100mm thick block wall filling existing opening.

To include all necessary wedging and pinning, cutting, toothing and bonding at jambs

and all access equipment. S.M. 66.25

3/2 schedule of rates

Page 141: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

DEMOLITIONS/ALTERATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

DEMOL031 Fit 19 x 50mm softwood architrave and 25 x 50mm plant to existing timber lining

(one side of lining only). To include all necessary mitres, scribing, drilling, plugging and

nailing, priming timbers before fixing. OCC. 27.00

DEMOL032 Fit 32mm thick softwood internal door lining complete with 13 x 38mm softwood stop

and 19 x 50mm softwood architrave (each side of lining).

To include all necessary mitres, scribing, drilling, plugging and nailing, priming timbers

before fixing. OCC. 86.85

DEMOL033 Fit 32mm thick softwood storey height internal door lining complete with 13 x 38mm

softwood stop and beads, 19 x 50mm softwood architrave (each side of lining) and

9mm thick plywood infill panel above door.

To include all necessary mitres, scribing, drilling, plugging and nailing, priming timbers

before fixing. OCC. 106.90

DEMOL034 Fit 19 x 127mm hardwood carpet threshold. To include plugging, screwing and pellating. OCC. 13.75

DEMOL035 Supply and fix new 35mm thick hardboard faced flush door to B.S. 459, size to suit

existing opening including all associated ironmongery.

Ironmongery to consist of one pair of 75mm steel butt hinges, mortice latch and set of

SAA lever furniture OCC. 68.50

DEMOL036 Building Control Application. To include completion of application, payment of fee and

submission of all building control notices to satisfaction of Building Control Officer. Actual

Submit completion notice and invoice to Contract Administrator for recovery of OCC. Cost

statutory costs.

DEMOL037 Moving gas meter. To include completion of application to obtain quotation

(using approved form supplied by Transco), modifications of existing internal supply

pipework and payment of fee. Allow for all necessary attendance and submit invoice to Actual

Contract Administrator for recovery of statutory costs. OCC. Cost

Tower type scaffolding (up to 7.5m above ground level). Includes erection with all

necessary fittings, boards, ladders and removal on completion.

DEMOL039 First lift OCC. 12.50

DEMOL040 Subsequent lifts OCC. 5.90

DEMOL041 Moving erected wheel mounted tower type scaffolding (per metre distance moved). L.M. 4.40

3/3 schedule of rates

Page 142: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

DEMOLITIONS/ALTERATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

DEMOL042 Independent scaffolding. Includes erection with all necessary fittings, boards, ladders,

pulley etc. and removal on completion.

(measured per square metre of external face of wall). S.M. 22.70

DEMOL050 Easi Deck independent scaffolding system. Includes erection with all necessary OCC. 77.60

fittings, roof ladder and removal on completion.

3/4 schedule of rates

Page 143: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

KITCHEN FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

KUNIT001 Remove and dispose of wall unit. Make good structure and finishings disturbed. OCC. 4.05

KUNIT002 Remove and dispose of floor/sink unit. Make good structure and finishings disturbed. OCC. 4.05

KUNIT003 Remove and dispose of sink unit. Includes repositioning unit with flexible connections to

existing services to provide temporary facilities. OCC. 20.40

KUNIT004 Remove and dispose of cupboard/larder unit. Make good structure and finishings OCC. 6.10

disturbed.

KUNIT005 Remove and dispose of 500mm or 600mm wide work top. L.M. 3.05

Includes wall batten, jointing strips andchrome support leg.

KUNIT006 Remove and dispose of gallows bracket. Make good structure and finishings disturbed. OCC. 8.00

Fit wall unit. To include drilling, plug and screw fixings with mirror plates or

manufacturer's fixings, all battening and scribing, forming holes for pipework or the like

and any other material for levelling.

KUNIT009 720 high x 300 wide x 300 deep type 733W OCC. 37.05

KUNIT010 720 high x 400 wide x 300 deep type 743W OCC. 39.20

KUNIT011 720 high x 500 wide x 300 deep type 753W OCC. 41.35

KUNIT012 720 high x 600 wide x 300 deep type 763W OCC. 43.40

KUNIT013 720 high x 800 wide x 300 deep type 783W OCC. 58.15

KUNIT014 720 high x 1000 wide x 300 deep type 7103W OCC. 62.35

KUNIT015 720 high x 625 wide x 300 deep corner wall unit with blank panel and corner post

fitted type 763CW OCC. 46.75

KUNIT017 Fit traditional pelmet to wall unit. To include all necessary mites and returns. L.M. 26.90

KUNIT018 Fit undershelf luminaire to wall unit. OCC. 81.50

To include for light switch (1 gang 1 way) and back box located adjacent to luminaire and

connection to existing circuit, remove/refit furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, forming holes

and chases for cables or the like and make good.

3/5 schedule of rates

Page 144: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

KITCHEN FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

Fit floor unit. To include all battening and scribing, forming holes for pipework or the like and any

other material for levelling, drilling, plug and screw to wall.

KUNIT020 900 high x 300 wide x 600 deep type 936D OCC. 59.60

KUNIT021 900 high x 400 wide x 600 deep type 946D OCC. 62.95

KUNIT022 900 high x 500 wide x 600 deep type 956D OCC. 66.45

KUNIT023 900 high x 600 wide x 600 deep type 966D OCC. 69.85

KUNIT024 900 high x 800 wide x 600 deep type 986D OCC. 97.45

KUNIT025 900 high x 1000 wide x 600 deep type 9106D OCC. 103.25

KUNIT026 900 high x 1200 wide x 600 deep type 9126D OCC. 112.00

KUNIT030 900 high x 800 wide x 600 deep corner floor unit with blank panel and corner post OCC. 79.25

fitted type 986CD35

KUNIT031 900 high x 800 wide x 600 deep corner floor unit with blank panel and corner post

fitted type 986CD36 OCC. 88.55

KUNIT032 900 high x 1000 wide x 600 deep corner floor unit with blank panel and corner post

fitted type 9106CD46 OCC. 88.55

KUNIT033 900 high x 1000 wide x 600 deep corner floor unit with blank panel and corner post

fitted type 9106CD56 OCC. 88.55

KUNIT034 900 high x 1200 wide x 600 deep corner floor unit with blank panel and corner post

fitted type 9126CD66 OCC. 94.30

3/6 schedule of rates

Page 145: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

KITCHEN FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

Fit floor unit. To include all battening and scribing, forming holes for pipework or the like and any

other material for levelling, drilling, plug and screw to wall.

KUNIT040 900 high x 500 wide x 600 deep sink base unit type 956SD OCC. 79.00

KUNIT041 900 high x 600 wide x 600 deep sink base unit type 966SD OCC. 82.55

KUNIT042 900 high x 800 wide x 600 deep sink base unit type 986SD OCC. 103.70

KUNIT043 900 high x 800 wide x 600 deep sink base unit type 986SDX OCC. 103.70

KUNIT044 900 high x 1000 wide x 600 deep sink base unit type 9106SD OCC. 113.95

KUNIT045 900 high x 1200 wide x 600 deep sink base unit type 9126SD OCC. 120.65

KUNIT046 900 high x 1000 wide x 600 deep corner sink unit with blank panel and corner post

fitted type 9106CSD56 OCC. 88.55

KUNIT050 900 high x 400 wide x 600 deep draw unit type 946DP OCC. 89.75

KUNIT051 900 high x 500 wide x 600 deep draw unit type 956DP OCC. 89.75

KUNIT052 900 high x 600 wide x 600 deep draw unit type 966DP OCC. 95.45

KUNIT053 900 high x 500 wide x 600 deep draw unit type 956MPD OCC. 94.20

KUNIT054 900 high x 600 wide x 600 deep draw unit type 966MPD OCC. 98.95

KUNIT060 2120 high x 500 wide x 600 deep larder unit type 2156L OCC. 102.00

KUNIT061 2120 high x 600 wide x 600 deep larder unit type 2166L OCC. 108.65

KUNIT062 2120 high x 500 wide x 600 deep broom cupboard unit type 2156B OCC. 101.10

KUNIT063 2120 high x 600 wide x 600 deep broom cupboard unit type 2166B OCC. 108.65

KUNIT064 Fit base end support panel 900 high x 600 wide type BE0900600COL.

To include fixing with table brackets. OCC. 19.00

KUNIT065 Fit base/wall infill panel 720 high x 150 wide. OCC. 12.75

KUNIT066 Fit base/wall infill panel 720 high x 300 wide. OCC. 18.80

KUNIT067 Fit tray spacer 300 wide type 936TS. OCC. 9.60

3/7 schedule of rates

Page 146: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

KITCHEN FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

KUNIT070 Fit 600 wide x 40 thick work top. To include all battening, fixing and scribing, forming holes for

pipework or the like and mastic sealant to all edges L.M. 33.65

KUNIT071 Fit formica edging to cut edges of work top. L.M. 7.95

KUNIT072 Fit jointing strip between work top type JNT0206 OCC. 9.60

KUNIT073 Fit jointing strip between work top type JNT0207 OCC. 9.60

KUNIT074 Fit end cap to edge of work top type JNT0208 OCC. 9.60

3/8 schedule of rates

Page 147: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

CEILING/WALL/ FLOOR FINISHINGS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

FINISH01 Remove and dispose of coving of any material e.g. Gyproc, plastic, polystyrene etc. L.M. 0.30

FINISH02 Remove and dispose of lath and plaster/plasterboard ceiling S.M. 8.85

FINISH03 Remove and dispose of lath and plaster/plasterboard ceiling in areas not exceeding

two square metres OCC. 17.70

FINISH04 Fit 12mm thick plasterboard lining to ceiling S.M. 15.20

FINISH05 Fit 12mm thick plasterboard lining to ceiling in areas not exceeding two square metres OCC. 34.10

FINISH06 Apply 2mm thick skim coat finish plaster to ceiling S.M. 7.95

FINISH07 Apply 2mm thick skim coat finish plaster to ceiling in areas not exceeding two square

metres OCC. 19.55

FINISH09 Fit Gyproc coving 100mm or 127mm. L.M. 7.95

FINISH10 Remove and dispose of glazed tiling exceeding 300mm wide.

Make good finishings disturbed. S.M. 30.95

FINISH11 Remove and dispose of glazed tiling not exceeding 300mm wide.

Make good finishings disturbed. L.M. 20.10

FINISH12 Hack off and dispose of rendering or plaster to walls S.M. 6.60

FINISH13 Hack off and dispose of rendering or plaster to walls in areas not exceeding two square OCC. 23.80

metres

FINISH14 Apply 13mm thick plaster finish to walls S.M. 10.70

FINISH15 Apply 13mm thick plaster finish to walls not exceeding 300mm wide L.M. 3.25

FINISH16 Apply 13mm thick plaster finish to walls in areas not exceeding two square metres OCC. 21.35

FINISH17 Fit angle bead to brick or blockwork base L.M. 2.50

FINISH18 Fit expanded metal lathing S.M. 17.10

FINISH19 Fit expanded metal lathing not exceeding 300mm wide L.M. 6.05

3/9 schedule of rates

Page 148: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

CEILING/WALL/ FLOOR FINISHINGS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

FINISH20 Fit 12mm thick plasterboard lining to walls S.M. 12.05

FINISH21 Fit 12mm thick plasterboard lining to reveals and soffits of openings and recesses not

exceeding 300mm wide. L.M. 4.60

FINISH22 Apply 2mm thick skim coat finish plaster to walls S.M. 10.70

FINISH23 Apply 2mm thick skim coat finish plaster to walls not exceeding 300mm wide. L.M. 3.25

FINISH24 Fit angle bead to plasterboard base L.M. 2.50

FINISH25 Fit glazed tiling exceeding 300mm wide (tiling supplied by others). S.M. 26.45

FINISH26 Fit glazed tiling not exceeding 300mm wide (tiling supplied by others). L.M. 12.20

FINISH27 Fit glazed tiling exceeding 300mm wide. S.M. 39.90

FINISH28 Fit coloured glazed tiling exceeding 300mm wide. S.M. 44.10

FINISH29 Fit glazed tiling not exceeding 300mm wide. L.M. 18.15

FINISH30 Fit coloured glazed tiling not exceeding 300mm wide. L.M. 19.45

FINISH31 Remove and dispose of timber skirting. Make good finishings disturbed. L.M. 0.30

FINISH32 Remove and dispose of quarry tile skirting not exceeding 150mm high.

Make good finishings disturbed. L.M. 2.75

FINISH33 Remove and dispose of quarry tile floor covering in areas not exceeding one square

metre. Make good with cement and sand floor screed to match existing finishings. OCC. 16.75

FINISH34 Remove and set aside carpet floor covering. OCC. 2.00

FINISH35 Remove and dispose of vinyl floor covering. To include cleaning off adhesive and preparing

surface for new covering. S.M. 9.75

FINISH36 Remove and dispose of vinyl floor covering and plywood sheeting. S.M. 3.90

3/10 schedule of rates

Page 149: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

CEILING/WALL/ FLOOR FINISHINGS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

FINISH37 Remove and dispose of floor screed to a depth of 75mm S.M. 20.70

FINISH38 Remove and dispose of floor screed to a depth of 75mmn in areas not exceeding two

square metres OCC. 41.40

FINISH39 Provide and lay 75mm thick cement and sand floor screed S.M. 21.55

FINISH40 Provide and lay 75mm thick cement and sand floor screed n areas not exceeding two

square metres OCC. 43.10

FINISH41 Provide and lay 6mm thick plywood over existing boarded floor S.M. 16.20

FINISH42 Provide and lay latex levelling screed S.M. 7.75

FINISH45 Provide and lay vinyl tile flooring S.M. 14.60

FINISH45 Provide and lay Polysafe Standard non slip flooring S.M. 18.80

FINISH50 Fit softwood skirting board not exceeding 100mm high. To include all necessary mitres

scribing, drilling, plugging and nailing, priming skirting before fixing. L.M. 7.00

FINISH51 Fit plastics window board not exceeding 225mm wide. To include reducing in size to suit L.M. 29.60

depth of reveal and mastic sealant to all edges.

3/11 schedule of rates

Page 150: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

DECORATING

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

DECOR001 Artex ceiling to patterned finish with brushed borders .

To include caulk and tape all joints, one sealer and one full coat of Artex to any

pattern. S.M. 10.25

DECOR002 Artex ceiling to patterned finish with brushed borders in areas not exceeding two

square metres. To include caulk and tape all joints, sealer to complete area and

one full coat of Artex to any pattern. OCC. 18.30

DECOR003 Artex ceiling to patterned finish with brushed borders. To include dubbing out existing

Artexing and one full coat of Artex to any pattern, clearing rooms and all access

equipment. S.M. 11.70

DECOR004 Apply one coat Stain Block to ceiling or walls. To include make good all cracks and holes,

rub down and wash as necessary, clearing rooms and all access equipment. S.M. 2.40

DECOR005 Apply two coats emulsion to ceiling on Artex base. To include make good all cracks and

holes, rub down and wash as necessary, clearing rooms and all access equipment. S.M. 2.95

DECOR006 Apply two coats emulsion to ceiling. To include make good all cracks and holes,

rub down and wash as necessary, clearing rooms and all access equipment. S.M. 2.95

DECOR007 Apply mist coat and two coats emulsion to walls. Includes make good all cracks and

holes, rub down, clearing rooms and all access equipment. S.M. 4.90

DECOR008 Apply undercoat and gloss to skirtings, picture rails, architraves, linings and the like

exceeding 300mm girth. S.M. 5.85

DECOR009 Apply undercoat and gloss to skirtings, picture rails, architraves, linings and the like

not exceeding 300mm girth. L.M. 1.65

DECOR010 Apply primer, undercoat and gloss to general surfaces exceeding 300mm girth. S.M. 9.40

DECOR011 Apply primer, undercoat and gloss to general surfaces not exceeding 300mm girth. L.M. 3.95

DECOR012 Apply undercoat and gloss to general surfaces exceeding 300mm girth.

Includes burn off and scrape any unsound paintwork, prime all bare areas, rub down,

stop up, dust and all access equipment. S.M. 6.60

DECOR013 Apply undercoat and gloss to general surfaces not exceeding 300mm girth.

Includes burn off and scrape any unsound paintwork, prime all bare areas, rub down,

stop up, dust and all access equipment. L.M. 1.75

3/12 schedule of rates

Page 151: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

DECORATING

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

DECOR015 Apply undercoat and gloss to no bar window (internal). Includes burn off and scrap any

unsound paintwork, prime all bare areas, rub down, stop up, dust and all access

equipment (linear metre measurement is total girth of window). L.M. 3.35

DECOR016 Apply undercoat and gloss to full bar window (internal). Includes burn off and scrap any

unsound paintwork, prime all bare areas, rub down, stop up, dust and all access

equipment (linear metre measurement is total girth of window). L.M. 5.25

DECOR017 Apply undercoat and gloss to radiator. Includes burn off and scrape any unsound

paintwork, prime all bare areas, rub down, stop up and dust. S.M. 3.55

DECOR018 Apply undercoat and gloss to pipes up to 50mm diameter. Includes burn off and scrape

any unsound paintwork, prime all bare areas, rub down, stop up with flexible filler and

dust. L.M. 0.35

DECOR019 Apply undercoat and gloss to pipes exceeding 50mm but not greater than 150mm in

diameter. Includes burn off and scrape any unsound paintwork, prime all bare areas,

rub down, stop up with flexible filler and dust. L.M. 4.70

DECOR020 Apply two coats staining to normal window (external). Includes rub down, stop up, dust

and all access equipment (linear metre measurement is total girth of window). L.M. 4.40

DECOR021 Apply two coats staining to full bar window (external). Includes rub down, stop up, dust

and all access equipment (linear metre measurement is total girth of window). L.M. 7.15

3/13 schedule of rates

Page 152: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

SANITARY APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

SSINK001 Remove and dispose of stainless steel sink top with associated taps, waste pipework and

fittings. To include removal of 4m of 15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any

modifications of existing pipework. OCC. 10.40

SSINK002 Fit 600 wide x 1000 long left or right hand stainless steel sink top with single drainer

complete with deck mixer lever tap, combination waste, trap with tee off for washing

machine, waste pipework and fittings, overflow, plug and chain.

To include replacing on average 4m of 15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any

modifications of existing pipework, fit chromium plated in-line service valve (2 No.)

and mastic sealant to back edge of sink top. OCC. 189.95

SSINK003 Fit 508 wide x 950 long left or right hand stainless steel insert sink top with single drainer

complete with deck mixer lever tap, combination waste, trap with tee off for

washing machine, waste pipework and fittings, overflow, plug and chain.

To include replacing on average 4m of 15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any

modifications of existing pipework, fit chromium plated in-line service valve (2 No.) OCC. 189.95

SSINK004 Fit washing machine valve OCC. 4.95

SSINK005 Fit washing machine stand pipe. To include waste trap, pipework and associated fittings,

connection to existing soil pipe or gulley, forming holes for pipework or the like and make

good. OCC. 36.05

SBASN001 Renew basin taps. To include removal of existing taps and replacing with one pair of

lever taps, removing and replacing 1m of 15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any

modifications of existing pipework, fit chromium plated in-line service valves (2 No). OCC. 65.60

SBASN002 Renew 360 wide x 265 deep basin complete with one pair of lever taps, trap, waste

pipework and fittings, plug and chain.

To include removal of the above appliance and fittings and replacing on average 2m of

15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing pipework, fit

chromium plated in-line service valve (2 No.) and mastic sealant to back edge of basin. OCC. 129.00

SBASN003 Renew 560 wide x 415 deep pedestal basin complete with one pair of lever taps, trap,

waste pipework and fittings, plug and chain.

To include removal of the above appliance and fittings and replacing on average 2m of

15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing pipework, fit

chromium plated in-line service valve (2 No.) and mastic sealant to back edge of basin. OCC. 170.05

3/14 schedule of rates

Page 153: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

SANITARY APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

SBATH001 Renew bath taps. To include removal of existing taps and replacing with one pair of

lever taps, removing and replacing 2m of 22mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any

modifications of existing pipework, fit chromium plated in-line service valves (2 No),

remove, refit bath panel and skirting. OCC. 107.80

Renew standard bath complete with one pair of lever taps, waste pipework and fittings,

combination trap and overflow, plug and chain, plastic bath panel and framing, infill pieces

and framing to end or ends of bath where gap to wall does not exceed 150mm.

To include removal of the above appliance and fittings and replacing on average 2m of

22mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing pipework, fit

chromium plated in-line service valve (2 No.) and mastic sealant to perimeter of bath

SBATH003 700 wide x 1500 long OCC. 437.95

SBATH004 700 wide x 1600 long OCC. 437.95

SBATH005 700 wide x 1700 long OCC. 440.10

SBATH006 Renew bath end panel and framing. To include removal and disposal of existing. OCC. 37.35

SBATH007 Renew bath infill panel, shelf and framing. To include removal and disposal of existing. OCC. 37.35

SCIST001 Renew low level cistern complete with flush pipe, overflow pipework and fittings.

To include removal of the above appliance and fittings and replacing on average 1m of

15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing supply or

overflow pipework, forming holes for pipework or the like and fit chromium plated

in-line service valve. OCC. 102.05

SCIST002 Renew low level cistern and WC pan with 'P' trap complete with seat, flush pipe,

overflow pipework and fittings, multikwick connector to existing drain or soil pipe.

To include removal of the above appliance and fittings and replacing on average 1m of

15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing supply or

overflow pipework, forming holes for pipework or the like and fit chromium plated OCC. 186.35

in-line service valve.

SCIST003 Renew low level cistern and WC pan with 'P' trap complete with seat, flush pipe,

overflow pipework and fittings, multikwick connector to existing drain or soil pipe.

To include removal of existing high level cistern and WC pan, replacing on average 1m of

15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing supply or

overflow pipework, forming holes for pipework or the like and fit chromium plated

in-line service valve. OCC. 192.45

3/15 schedule of rates

Page 154: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

SANITARY APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

SCIST004 Renew close coupled cistern and WC pan with 'P' trap complete with seat, overflow

pipework and fittings, multikwick connector to existing drain or soil pipe.

To include removal of the above appliance and fittings and replacing on average 1m of

15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing supply or

overflow pipework, forming holes for pipework or the like and fit chromium plated

in-line service valve. OCC. 288.80

SCIST005 Renew WC seat OCC. 15.00

SCIST010 Remove and refix WC pan (for other trades) OCC. 20.50

SHOW001 Ft Mira Minilite surface mounted thermostatic shower complete with all associated

fittings. To include up to 5m of 15mm chromium plated copper pipework and fittings for

connection to existing or new pipework. OCC. 271.05

SSOIL001 Remove and dispose of two sided pipe casing, 500mm girth x 2400mm high.

To include removal of softwood framing and plywood lining. OCC. 14.05

SSOIL002 Fit two sided pipe casing, 500mm girth x 2400mm high. To include 50 x 50mm treated

softwood framing and 6mm plywood lining fixed with brass cups and screws. OCC. 67.90

Renew cast iron soil and vent pipe with plastic.

To include removal of existing cast iron fittings and replacing with 110mm diameter

plastic pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing connections,

forming holes for pipework or the like.

SSOIL003 Bungalow OCC. 227.50

SSOIL004 House OCC. 277.60

Fit 110mm diameter plastic soil and vent pipe. To include all associated fittings,

pipe clips and any modification of existing connections, forming holes for pipework or

the like.

SSOIL007 Bungalow OCC. 166.85

SSOIL008 House OCC. 215.95

3/16 schedule of rates

Page 155: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

SANITARY APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

SFITT001 Remove and refix washing machine. To include connection to existing services. OCC. 20.40

SFITT002 Remove and refix gas cooker. To include connection to existing services. OCC. 20.40

SFITT003 Remove copper pipework (not exceeding 28mm diameter) and all associated fittings, L.M. 1.20

pipe clips.

SFITT004 Fit 15mm copper pipework. To include all associated fittings and pipe clips. L.M. 14.35

SFITT005 Fit 22mm copper pipework. To include all associated fittings and pipe clips. L.M. 21.45

SFITT006 Remove and refix radiator complete with valves and brackets. OCC. 11.70

SFITT007 Drain down, refill and vent central heating system. OCC. 23.70

SFITT008 Sentinel OCC. 14.05

SFITT010 Fit gas cooker fitting and back plate. OCC. 14.05

SFITT011 Gas Installation Completion Certificate for additional works testing.

To include testing and completion of certificate for work involved in alteration or

additions to existing installation. OCC. 6.05

SFITT020 Fit Surestop stop valve. OCC. 65.50

SFITT022 Renew 22mm stop cock.

To include locating external stop cock and turning off/on. OCC. 21.30

3/17 schedule of rates

Page 156: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ELECT001 Remove and dispose of socket outlet and cabling. Make good structure and finishings OCC. 8.55

disturbed.

ELECT002 Remove and dispose of cooker control panel and cabling. Make good structure and OCC. 8.55

finishings disturbed.

ELECT003 Remove and dispose of light switch (light fitting included elsewhere) and cabling . OCC. 3.48

Make good structure and finishings disturbed.

ELECT004 Remove and refix cooker. OCC. 20.40

ELECT005 Remove and refix fridge. OCC. 20.40

ELECT006 Fit single socket and back box. To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing

circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and

any modifications of existing supply, forming holes for cables or the like and make good. OCC. 30.85

ELECT007 Fit double socket and back box. To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing

circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and

any modifications of existing supply, forming holes for cables or the like and make good. OCC. 33.30

ELECT008 Fit double pole switched fused connection unit and back box. To include up to 12m of

cable for connection to existing circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit furniture,

floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply,

forming holes for cables or the like and make good. OCC. 37.55

ELECT009 Fit double pole switched fused connection unit and back box with associated single

socket and back box adjacent to washing machine position. To include up to 12m of

cable for connection to existing circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit furniture,

floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply, forming holes

for cables or the like and make good. OCC. 53.50

ELECT010 Fit cooker control panel (two gang plate, marked 'cooker' with neon indicator) and

back box with associated cooker cable outlet and back box.

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to consumer unit, remove/refit furniture,

floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply, forming holes

for cables or the like and make good. OCC. 78.50

ELECT011 Fit light switch (1 gang 2 way) and back box. To include up to 12m of cable for

connection to existing circuit, remove/refit furniture, floor coverings, floor boards,

clips and any modifications of existing supply, forming holes for cables or the like and

make good. OCC. 23.50

3/18 schedule of rates

Page 157: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ELECT020 Fit kitchen extractor fan (wall mounted) with associated double pole switched fused connection

unit and back box adjacent to fan position.

OCC. 219.55

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit

furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply, forming

holes for fan, cables or the like and make good.

ELECT022 Fit kitchen extractor fan (ceiling mounted with insulated ducting in roof space up to 3m in length

and tile terminal) with associated double pole switched fused connection unit and back box

adjacent to fan position.

OCC. 291.90

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit

furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply,

remove/refit roof insulation, forming holes for fan, cables or the like and make good.

ELECT024 Fit bathroom extractor fan (wall mounted) with associated double pole switched fused OCC. 219.55

connection unit and back box in appropriate zone.

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit

furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply,

remove/refit roof insulation, forming holes for fan, cables or the like and make good.

ELECT025 Fit SELV bathroom extractor fan (wall mounted) with associated double pole switched fused

connection unit and back box in appropriate zone.

OCC. 250.20

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit

furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply, forming

holes for fan, cables or the like and make good.

ELECT027 Fit bathroom extractor fan (ceiling mounted with insulated ducting in roof space up to 3m in

length and tile terminal) with associated double pole switched fused connection unit and back box

in appropriate zone.

OCC. 291.90

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit

furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply,

remove/refit roof insulation, forming holes for fan, cables or the like and make good.

ELECT028 Fit SELV bathroom extractor fan (ceiling mounted with insulated ducting in roof space up to 3m in

length and tile terminal) with associated double pole switched fused connection unit and back box

in appropriate zone.

OCC. 322.55

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit

furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply,

remove/refit roof insulation, forming holes for fan, cables or the like and make good.

3/19 schedule of rates

Page 158: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ELECT030 Fit Mira Sport 9Kw electric shower with associated double pole ceiling switch and pattress. OCC. 420.90

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing consumer unit or new RCD, remove/refit

furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply, forming

holes for cables or the like and make good.

Replacing on average 2m of 15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing

pipework, fit in-line double check valve and scale inhibitor.

ELECT034 Fit new earth bonding to pipework.

To include two earth clamps and up to 1m of cable for connection. OCC. 30.55

ELECT040 Renew bulkhead light fitting in bathroom with Robus R100 LED light.

To include remove and dispose of existing batten holder, any modifications of existing

supply and connection to existing circuit OCC. 56.30

ELECT042 Renew single fluorescent light fitting, 1200mm long.

To include remove and dispose of existing batten holder, any modifications of existing

supply and connection to existing circuits OCC. 34.00

ELECT044 Renew light switch (1 or 2 gang).

To include remove and dispose of existing switch, any modifications of existing supply and

connection to existing circuit. OCC. 8.30

ELECT046 Renew ceiling rose, light flex and lamp holder.

To include remove and dispose of existing fittings, any modifications of existing supply and

connection to existing circuit OCC. 17.70

ELECT048 Renew single socket and back box.

To include remove and dispose of existing fittings, any modifications of existing supply and

connection to existing circuit OCC. 10.40

ELECT049 Renew double socket and back box.

To include remove and dispose of existing fittings, any modifications of existing supply

and connection to existing circuit OCC. 14.05

Renew consumer unit and pattress. To include remove and dispose of existing consumer unit, any

modifications of existing supply and connection to existing circuits

ELECT050 10 way OCC. 234.85

ELECT052 15 Way OCC. 243.00

3/20 schedule of rates

Page 159: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ELECT054 Chase out plaster and make good. Chase out with power tool with attached dust L.M. 9.20

extractor facility. Make good with ready mixed low shrinkage plaster .

Includes protective cable casing.

ELECT056 Chase out plaster for back box (1 gang) and make good. OCC. 7.05

ELECT057 Chase out plaster for back box (2 gang) and make good. OCC. 7.80

ELECT060 Building Control Part P application. To include completion of application and payment of OCC. 2.45

any fee.

ELECT062 Electrical Installation Completion Certificate for additional works testing.

To include testing and completion of certificate for work involved in major alteration or additions

to existing circuits or new circuits. OCC. 40.90

ELECT065 Electrical Installation Completion Certificate for whole installation testing.

To include testing and completion of certificate for work involved in changing a consumer

unit. OCC. 136.60

3/21 schedule of rates

Page 160: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

AIDS AND ADAPTATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ADAPT001 Remove and dispose of half brick wall. To included all necessary cutting and all access

equipment. S.M. 4.70

ADAPT002 Remove and dispose of block wall or partition not exceeding 150mm thick.

To included all necessary cutting and all access equipment. S.M. 4.70

ADAPT003 Remove and dispose of paramount partition not exceeding 100mm thick.

To included all access equipment. S.M. 4.70

ADAPT004 Remove and dispose of studwork partition with plasterboard covering each side not

exceeding 150mm thick. To included all access equipment. S.M. 6.05

ADAPT005 Remove and dispose of existing door, butts, keep, door stop and architrave (one side of

lining only). Make good to lining with surface splice to old butt and keep housings. OCC. 12.10

ADAPT006 Remove door, set aside and rehang. OCC. 14.05

ADAPT007 Remove door and rehang to open other way. To include all necessary alterations to stop,

latch and furniture, surface splice old hinges and keep position. OCC. 51.15

ADAPT008 Remove and dispose of door frame/lining (timber or steel) and door. OCC. 24.20

ADAPT009 Remove and dispose of timber carpet threshold. OCC. 6.05

ADAPT010 Remove and dispose of timber or steel window including associated window board and

sub frame, up to one square metre in area. OCC. 25.05

ADAPT011 Remove and dispose of timber or steel window including associated window board and

sub frame, one to two square metres in area. OCC. 27.20

ADAPT012 Remove and dispose of 225 x 225mm terracotta air vent internally.

To include filling existing opening with common brickwork and make good to plaster

finish. OCC. 9.80

ADAPT013 Widen existing door opening in non loadbearing wall. To include remove and dispose of

door and lining, cut out brickwork or blockwork (up to 125mm), fit new galvanised steel

internal lintel, provide temporary support and all access equipment.

Adapt timber skirting and make good to walls and floor as necessary. OCC. 146.30

ADAPT014 Widen existing door opening in loadbearing wall. To include remove and dispose of door

and lining, cut out brickwork or blockwork (up to 125mm), fit new galvanised steel box

beam lintel, provide temporary support and all access equipment.

Adapt timber skirting and make good to walls and floor as necessary. OCC. 162.00

3/22 schedule of rates

Page 161: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

AIDS AND ADAPTATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ADAPT015 Build half brick wall in common bricks filling existing opening.

To include all necessary wedging and pinning, cutting, toothing and bonding at jambs and

all access equipment. S.M. 73.00

ADAPT016 Build half brick wall in facing bricks to match existing filling existing opening.

To include all necessary wedging and pinning, cutting, toothing and bonding at jambs and

all access equipment. S.M. 81.00

ADAPT017 Build 100mm thick block wall filling existing opening.

To include all necessary wedging and pinning, cutting, toothing and bonding at jambs and

all access equipment. S.M. 66.25

ADAPT018 Build 50 x 100mm studwork framing for partition.

To include all necessary noggins, lap joints, drilling , plug and fix to walls, ceilings and

floors and all access equipment. S.M. 32.40

ADAPT019 Fit 32mm thick softwood internal door lining complete with 13 x 38mm softwood stop and

19 x 50mm softwood architrave (each side of lining).

To include all necessary mitres, scribing, drilling, plugging and nailing, priming timbers

before fixing. OCC. 86.85

ADAPT020 Fit 32mm thick softwood storey height internal door lining complete with 13 x 38mm

softwood stop and beads, 19 x 50mm softwood architrave (each side of lining) and

9mm thick plywood infill panel above door.

To include all necessary mitres, scribing, drilling, plugging and nailing, priming timbers

before fixing. OCC. 106.90

ADAPT021 Remove existing hardwood carpet threshold, bevel edges to one third of width on both

sides of tread to allow wheel chair access. Refix by plugging, screwing and pellating. OCC. 23.00

ADAPT022 Fit 19 x 127 x 900mm hardwood carpet threshold. To include plugging, screwing and OCC. 13.75

pellating.

ADAPT023 Fit 127mm wide x 900mm aluminium carpet threshold. To include plugging, screwing and OCC. 33.90

pellating.

ADAPT024 Fit 726 x 1981 x 35mm thick hardboard faced flush door to B.S. 459, size to suit existing

opening including all associated ironmongery.

Ironmongery to consist of one pair of 75mm steel butt hinges, mortice latch and set of

SAA lever furniture OCC. 68.50

3/23 schedule of rates

Page 162: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

AIDS AND ADAPTATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ADAPT025 Fit 838 x 1981 x 35mm thick hardboard faced sliding door. To include extending lining on

new door side to fit sliding door, fit sliding door, track, gear, handles, floor stops, brushes

and timber pelmet. Prime all timber before fixing. OCC. 123.30

ADAPT029 Easi Deck independent scaffolding system. Includes erection with all necessary fittings, OCC. 77.60

roof ladder and removal on completion.

ADAPT030 Remove and dispose of coving of any material e.g. Gyproc, plastic, polystyrene etc. L.M. 0.30

ADAPT031 Fit 12mm thick plasterboard to ceiling in areas not exceeding one square metre. OCC. 31.95

ADAPT032 Apply 2mm thick skim coat finish plaster to ceiling in areas not exceeding one square

metre. OCC. 22.20

ADAPT033 Fit Gyproc coving 100mm or 127mm. L.M. 7.95

ADAPT034 Remove and dispose of glazed tiling exceeding 300mm wide. S.M. 30.95

Make good finishings disturbed.

ADAPT035 Remove and dispose of glazed tiling not exceeding 300mm wide. L.M. 20.10

Make good finishings disturbed.

ADAPT036 Apply 13mm thick plaster finish to walls not exceeding 300mm wide L.M. 3.25

ADAPT037 Apply 13mm thick plaster finish to walls in areas not exceeding two square metres OCC. 21.35

ADAPT038 Fit 12mm thick plasterboard to walls. S.M. 12.05

ADAPT039 Apply 2mm thick skim coat finish plaster to walls S.M. 10.70

ADAPT040 Fit glazed tiling exceeding 300mm wide. S.M. 39.90

ADAPT041 Fit glazed tiling not exceeding 300mm wide. L.M. 18.15

ADAPT042 Fit only glazed tiling exceeding 300mm wide (tiling supplied by others). S.M. 26.45

ADAPT043 Fit only glazed tiling not exceeding 300mm wide (tiling supplied by others). L.M. 12.20

3/24 schedule of rates

Page 163: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

AIDS AND ADAPTATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ADAPT045 Remove and dispose of timber skirting. Make good finishings disturbed. L.M. 0.30

ADAPT046 Remove and dispose of quarry tile skirting not exceeding 150mm high.

Make good finishings disturbed. L.M. 2.75

ADAPT047 Remove and set aside carpet floor covering. S.M. 2.00

ADAPT048 Remove and dispose of quarry tile flooring. S.M. 5.05

ADAPT049 Remove and dispose of vinyl floor covering. To include cleaning off adhesive

preparing surface for new covering. S.M. 9.75

ADAPT050 Remove and dispose of vinyl floor covering and plywood sheeting. S.M. 3.90

ADAPT051 Remove and dispose of floor screed to a depth of 75mmn in areas not exceeding two

square metres. OCC. 41.40

ADAPT052 Apply two coats bituminous emulsion damp proof membrane on concrete base.

To include sand blinding. S.M. 8.35

ADAPT053 Provide and lay 75mm thick cement and sand floor screed in areas not exceeding two

square metres. OCC. 43.10

ADAPT054 Provide and lay 6mm thick plywood over existing boarded floor. S.M. 16.20

ADAPT055 Provide and lay latex screed. S.M. 7.75

ADAPT056 Provide and lay Altro Safety flooring. S.M. 50.40

ADAPT057 Provide and lay Altro Safety flooring to form coved skirting 100mm high

To include cove former and captile/capping seal. L.M. 20.10

ADAPT058 Fit softwood skirting board not exceeding 100mm high. To include all necessary mitres,

scribing, drilling, plugging and nailing, priming skirting before fixing. L.M. 7.00

ADAPT070 Artex ceiling to patterned finish with brushed borders. To include caulk and tape all

joints, sealer to complete area and one full coat of Artex to any pattern. S.M. 10.25

ADAPT071 Apply undercoat and gloss to skirtings, picture rails, architraves, linings and the like

exceeding 300mm girth. S.M. 5.85

ADAPT072 Apply undercoat and gloss to skirtings, picture rails, architraves, linings and the like

not exceeding 300mm girth. L.M. 1.65

3/25 schedule of rates

Page 164: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

AIDS AND ADAPTATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ADAPT073 Apply primer, undercoat and gloss to general surfaces exceeding 300mm girth. S.M. 9.40

ADAPT074 Apply primer, undercoat and gloss to general surfaces not exceeding 300mm girth. L.M. 3.95

ADAPT075 Remove paper from walls. Includes all access equipment S.M. 1.95

ADAPT076 Remove additional layer of paper from walls. Includes all access equipment. S.M. 3.55

ADAPT077 Remove washable paper from walls. Includes all access equipment. S.M. 3.55

ADAPT078 Remove painted woodchip paper from walls. Includes all access equipment. S.M. 3.55

ADAPT079 Renew stop cock in 22mm copper.

To include locating external stop cock and turning off/on. OCC. 21.30

ADAPT080 Renew sink taps. To include removal of existing taps and replacing with deck mixer

lever tap, removing and replacing 1m of 15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any

modifications of existing pipework, fit chromium plated in-line service valves (2 No). OCC. 92.80

ADAPT081 Remove and dispose of bath including taps, waste, bath panel and associated framing.

To include removal of 6m of 15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications

of existing pipework.

Fit level access shower tray in place of bath (on solid floor with new screed base)

complete with waste, trap, waste pipework and fittings.

To include cutting or modifying tray as necessary, cutting out existing screed and relay

to new shower tray, breaking up floor slab for connection of waste to existing drain or

soil pipe (maximum 2m), forming holes for pipework or the like and make good, mastic

sealant to back edge of shower tray. OCC. 400.10

(material cost of shower tray to be included with ADAPT098)

ADAPT082 Remove and dispose of bath including taps, waste, bath panel and associated framing.

To include removal of 6m of 15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications

of existing pipework.

Fit level access shower tray in place of bath (on timber floor) complete with waste, trap,

waste pipework and fittings. To include cutting or modifying tray as necessary, cutting out

timber floor, connection of waste to existing drain or soil pipe (maximum 2m), forming

holes for pipework or the like and make good, mastic sealant to back edge of shower tray. OCC. 363.30

(material cost of shower tray to be included with ADAPT098)

ADAPT083 Renew bath taps. To include removal of existing taps and replacing with one pair of

lever taps, removing and replacing 2m of 22mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any

modifications of existing pipework, fit chromium plated in-line service valves (2 No),

remove, refit bath panel and skirting. OCC. 107.80

3/26 schedule of rates

Page 165: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

AIDS AND ADAPTATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ADAPT084 Remove grab rail (up to 6 fixings). Make good structure and finishings disturbed. OCC. 0.90

ADAPT085 Fit only half height screen enclosure, one fixed panel and one set of doors. OCC. 14.65

ADAPT086 Fit only shower seat (up to 6 fixings) OCC. 16.20

ADAPT087 Fit only grab rail (up to 6 fixings) OCC. 6.40

ADAPT088 Fit only drop down rail (up to 6 fixings) OCC. 6.05

ADAPT089 Fit 2500mm long straight shower curtain rail complete with weighted shower curtain and

all associated fittings. OCC. 73.90

ADAPT090 Fit 1800mm long curved shower curtain rail complete with weighted shower curtain and

all associated fittings. OCC. 73.90

ADAPT091 Fit additional weighted shower curtain and all associated fittings. OCC. 39.95

ADAPT092 Renew basin taps. To include removal of existing taps and replacing with one pair of

lever taps, removing and replacing 1m of 15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any

modifications of existing pipework, fit chromium plated in-line service valves (2 No). OCC. 65.60

ADAPT093 Renew 360mm wide x 265mm deep basin complete with one pair of lever taps, trap,

waste pipework and fittings, plug and chain.

To include removal of the above appliance and fittings and replacing on average 2m of

15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing pipework,

fit chromium plated in-line service valve (2 No) and mastic sealant to back edge of basin. OCC. 129.00

ADAPT094 Renew 560mm wide x 415mm deep basin complete with one pair of lever taps, trap,

waste pipework and fittings, plug and chain.

To include removal of the above appliance and fittings and replacing on average 2m of

15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing pipework,

fit chromium plated in-line service valve (2 No) and mastic sealant to back edge of basin. OCC. 124.10

ADAPT095 Renew 350mm wide x 500mm deep corner basin complete with one pair of lever taps,

trap, waste pipework and fittings, plug and chain.

To include removal of existing pedestal basin and fittings and replacing on average 4m of

15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing pipework,

fit chromium plated in-line service valve (2 No) and mastic sealant to back edge of basin. OCC. 125.85

3/27 schedule of rates

Page 166: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

AIDS AND ADAPTATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ADAPT096 Fit only toilet plinth (up to 6 fixings) OCC. 6.05

ADAPT097 Renew low level cistern and WC pan with 'P' trap complete with seat, flush pipe,

overflow pipework and fittings, multikwick connector to existing drain or soil pipe.

To include removal of the above appliance and fittings and replacing on average 1m of

15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing supply or overflow

pipework, forming holes for pipework or the like and fit chromium plated

in-line service valve. OCC. 186.35

ADAPT098 Renew low level cistern and WC pan with 'P' trap complete with seat, flush pipe,

overflow pipework and fittings, multikwick connector to existing drain or soil pipe.

To include removal of existing high level cistern and WC pan, replacing on average 1m of

15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing supply or

overflow pipework, forming holes for pipework or the like and fit chromium plated

in-line service valve. OCC. 192.45

ADAPT099 Extra over for material cost of specialist fittings OCC. 0.00

ADAPT108 Ft Mira Excell EV surface mounted thermostatic shower complete with all associated fittings.

To include up to 5m of 15mm chromium plated copper pipework and fittings for

connection to existing or new pipework. OCC. 506.05

ADAPT110 Remove copper pipework (not exceeding 28mm diameter) and all associated fittings, pipe L.M. 1.20

clips.

ADAPT111 Fit 15mm copper pipework. To include all associated fittings and pipe clips. L.M. 14.35

ADAPT112 Fit 22mm copper pipework. To include all associated fittings and pipe clips. L.M. 21.45

ADAPT113 Remove and dispose of radiator and brackets. To include removal of 6m of 15mm

pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing pipework. OCC. 18.30

ADAPT114 Fit double radiator with single convection complete with locksheild/thermostatic valve. S.M. 144.15

ADAPT115 Fit pipework to radiator. To include up to 6m of 15mm pipework and fittings for

connection into existing circuit, remove/refit furniture, floor coverings, floor boards,

forming holes for pipework or the like and make good. OCC. 36.65

3/28 schedule of rates

Page 167: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

AIDS AND ADAPTATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ADAPT116 Drain down, refill and vent central heating system. OCC. 23.70

ADAPT117 Sentinal OCC. 14.05

ADAPT118 Remove and dispose of two sided pipe casing, 500mm girth x 2400mm high.

To include removal of softwood framing and plywood lining. OCC. 14.05

ADAPT119 Fit two sided pipe casing, 500mm girth x 2400mm high. To include 50 x 50mm treated

softwood framing and 6mm plywood lining fixed with brass cups and screws. OCC. 67.90

Renew cast iron soil and vent pipe with plastic.

To include removal of existing cast iron fittings and replacing with 110mm diameter

plastic pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of existing connections, forming

holes for pipework or the like.

ADAPT120 Bungalow OCC. 227.50

ADAPT121 House OCC. 277.60

Fit 110mm diameter plastic soil and vent pipe. To include all associated fittings, pipe clips

and any modification of existing connections, forming holes for pipework or the like.

ADAPT122 Bungalow OCC. 166.85

ADAPT123 House OCC. 215.95

ADAPT125 100mm diameter drainage pipe. To include excavating trench by hand up to 1m deep,

lay Supersleve pipe, granular bed and surround, backfilling with selected excavated

material and reinstating turf. Dispose of surplus excavated material off site. L.M. 45.50

ADAPT126 100mm diameter drainage pipe. To include excavating trench by hand up to 1m deep,

lay Supersleve pipe, concrete bed and surround, backfilling with selected excavated

material and reinstating turf. Dispose of surplus excavated material off site. L.M. 57.70

ADAPT127 Extra for breaking out 100mm thick concrete, compacting surface of filling, lay new

concrete bed or paving with tamp and float finish to match existing.

Dispose of surplus excavated material off site. L.M. 10.90

ADAPT128 Connection to existing manhole. To include breaking through wall and benching, install

three quarter section branch channel bend and make good. OCC. 25.60

ADAPT129 Gulley complete with grating. To include bedding and surrounding in concrete. OCC. 98.20

ADAPT130 Building Control Application. To include completion of application and submission of all

building control notices to satisfaction of Building Control Officer.

Submit completion notice to Contract Administrator. OCC. 6.05

3/29 schedule of rates

Page 168: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

AIDS AND ADAPTATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ADAPT140 Remove and dispose of batten lamp holder and cabling. Make good structure and

finishings disturbed. OCC. 3.50

ADAPT141 Remove and dispose of light switch (light fitting included elsewhere) and cabling .

Make good structure and finishings disturbed. OCC. 3.50

ADAPT142 Remove and dispose of cord pull switch (light fitting included elsewhere) and cabling .

Make good structure and finishings disturbed. OCC. 3.50

ADAPT143 Remove and dispose of electric shower unit with associated ceiling switch and cabling .

Make good structure and finishings disturbed. OCC. 21.55

ADAPT144 Fit one way pull switch and mounting block. To include up to 12m of cable for

connection to existing circuit, remove/refit furniture, floor coverings, floor boards,

clips and any modifications of existing supply, forming holes for cables or the like and

make good. OCC. 13.25

ADAPT145 Fit bathroom extractor fan (wall mounted) with associated double pole switched fused connection

unit and back box in appropriate zone.

OCC. 219.55

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit

furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply,

remove/refit roof insulation, forming holes for fan, cables or the like and make good.

ADAPT146 Fit SELV bathroom extractor fan (wall mounted) with associated double pole switched fused

connection unit and back box in appropriate zone.

OCC. 250.20

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit

furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply, forming

holes for fan, cables or the like and make good.

ADAPT147 Fit bathroom extractor fan (ceiling mounted with insulated ducting in roof space up to 3m in

length and tile terminal) with associated double pole switched fused connection unit and back box

in appropriate zone.

OCC. 291.90

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit

furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply,

remove/refit roof insulation, forming holes for fan, cables or the like and make good.

3/30 schedule of rates

Page 169: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

AIDS AND ADAPTATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ADAPT148 Fit SELV bathroom extractor fan (ceiling mounted with insulated ducting in roof space up to 3m in

length and tile terminal) with associated double pole switched fused connection unit and back box

in appropriate zone.

OCC. 322.55

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit

furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing supply,

remove/refit roof insulation, forming holes for fan, cables or the like and make good.

ADAPT150 Renew bathroom extractor fan (wall mounted). OCC. 182.00

To include isolate/reconnet supply, renew through wall fan with ducting and external louvred

grille and make good.

ADAPT155 Renew bathroom extractor fan (ceiling mounted). OCC. 184.90

To include isolate/reconnet supply and flexible ducting, renew ceiling fan and make good.

ADAPT160 Fit AKW Care electric shower with associated double pole ceiling switch and pattress. OCC. 450.30

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing consumer unit or new RCD,

remove/refit furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of

existing supply, forming holes for cables or the like and make good.

Replacing on average 2m of 15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of

existing pipework, fit in-line double check valve and scale inhibitor.

ADAPT162 Fit Mira Advance electric shower with associated double pole ceiling switch and pattress. OCC. 479.65

To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing consumer unit or new RCD,

remove/refit furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of

existing supply, forming holes for cables or the like and make good.

Replacing on average 2m of 15mm pipework, fittings, pipe clips and any modifications of

existing pipework, fit in-line double check valve and scale inhibitor.

ADAPT164 Fit Dimplex wall fan heater with associated double pole isolating switch and back box in

appropriate zone. To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing consumer unit,

remove/refit furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and any modifications of existing

supply, forming holes for cables or the like and make good. OCC. 72.70

ADAPT166 Fit new earth bonding to pipework.

To include two earth clamps and up to 1m of cable for connection. OCC. 30.55

ADAPT168 Fit 25 x 16mm PVC mini trunking L.M. 3.60

3/31 schedule of rates

Page 170: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

AIDS AND ADAPTATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ADAPT170 Renew bulkhead light fitting in bathroom with Robus R100 LED light. OCC. 56.30

To include remove and dispose of existing batten holder, any modifications of existing

supply and connection to existing circuit

Renew consumer unit and pattress. To include remove and dispose of existing consumer unit, any

modifications of existing supply and connection to existing circuits

ADAPT172 10 way OCC. 234.85

ADAPT173 15 Way OCC. 243.00

ADAPT180 Chase out plaster and make good. Chase out with power tool with attached dust L.M. 9.20

extractor facility. Make good with ready mixed low shrinkage plaster .

Includes protective cable casing.

ADAPT182 Chase out plaster for back box (1 gang) and make good. OCC. 7.00

ADAPT183 Chase out plaster for back box (2 gang) and make good. OCC. 7.80

ADAPT185 Building Control Part P application. To include completion of application and payment OCC. 2.45

of any fee.

ADAPT187 Electrical Installation Completion Certificate for additional works testing.

To include testing and completion of certificate for work involved in major alteration or

additions to existing circuits or new circuits. OCC. 40.90

ADAPT188 Electrical Installation Completion Certificate for whole installation testing.

To include testing and completion of certificate for work involved in changing a

consumer unit. OCC. 136.60

ADAPT200 Fit only Smoke Alarm System consisting of control panel, single smoke detector and

vibrating pad (electrical connection included below).

Fit single socket and back box. To include up to 12m of cable for connection to existing

circuit or consumer unit, remove/refit furniture, floor coverings, floor boards, clips and

any modifications of existing supply, forming holes for cables or the like and make good. OCC. 61.40

ADAPT201 Remove and dispose of concrete/stone step. OCC. 9.80

ADAPT220 Excavating to reduce levels not exceeding 150mm deep. S.M. 8.70

To include disposal of surplus excavated material off site.

ADAPT221 Filling to excavations with selected excavated material not exceeding 250mm deep. S.M. 9.00

To include levelling and compacting surface of filling.

ADAPT222 Filling to excavations with hardcore not exceeding 250mm deep.. M.C. 46.40

To include levelling and compacting surface of filling.

3/32 schedule of rates

Page 171: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

AIDS AND ADAPTATIONS

REF No JOB DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE

ADAPT223 100mm thick concrete bed or paving with tamped and float finish to match existing.

To include excavating to reduce levels, hardcore base, levelling and compacting

surface of filling and disposal of surplus excavated material off site. S.M. 30.50

ADAPT224 Concrete bed, paving or ramp with tamped and float finish to match existing. M.C. 142.90

ADAPT225 1200 gauge polythene sheet damp proof membrane S.M. 0.95

ADAPT226 Formwork to edges of beds, slabs or steps not exceeding 250mm high.

To include all temporary supports. L.M. 31.30

ADAPT227 Formwork to edges of beds, slabs or steps 250-500mm high.

To include all temporary supports. L.M. 50.26

ADAPT228 10mm wide Flexcell expansion joint 150-300mm deep.

To include mastic sealant to top edge. L.M. 3.30

ADAPT230 75 x 75 x 1500 pressure impregnated wrought softwood post, set 600 into ground.

To include excavating hole, backfilling around post in concrete and disposal of surplus

excavated material off site. OCC. 35.90

ADAPT231 48.3 diameter x 1500 hollow tube section galvanised steel post (Kee Klamp Limited),

set 600 into ground with fixing plate ref. 70-8 and swivel flange ref. C58-8.

To include excavating hole, backfilling around post in concrete and disposal of surplus

excavated material off site. OCC. 49.85

ADAPT232 Extra for breaking out 100mm thick concrete bed or paving around post.

Reinstating concrete bed or paving with tamped and float finish to match existing. OCC. 19.55

ADAPT233 Fit 25 x 100mm pressure impregnated wrought softwood rail or upstand.

To include all necessary mitres and screwing. L.M. 6.05

ADAPT234 Fit 25 x 100mm pressure impregnated wrought softwood rail or upstand.

To include all necessary mitres, plugging and screwing. L.M. 7.35

ADAPT235 Fit 50 x 75mm pressure impregnated wrought softwood mopstick handrail.

To include all necessary mitres and screwing. L.M. 7.15

ADAPT236 Fit anodised aluminium handrail bracket. To include plugging and screwing. OCC. 8.30

ADAPT237 Apply two coats staining to rails, handrails and the like not exceeding 300mm girth. L.M. 1.65

3/33 schedule of rates

Page 172: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

SD044 Term Contract 2015 (EU) FT/1

FORM OF TENDER

INSTALLATION OF

REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 2016 - 2019

1. I/We, the undersigned, hereby offer and agree to carry out and complete the Works

which are within the scope of and in accordance with the Contract upon and subject to the following Adjustment Percentage (Contract Particulars item 11.1) to the rates listed in the Schedule of Rates

Percentage Addition Against Schedule of Rates

or

Percentage Deduction Against Schedule of Rates

........................ %

........................ %

and, upon and subject to the addition or deduction of the following Adjustment

Percentage to the rates (KUNIT009-KUNIT0017, KUNIT020-KUNIT026, KUNIT030-KUNIT034, KUNIT040-KUNIT046, KUNIT050-KUNIT054, KUNIT060-KUNIT067 and KUNIT070-KUNIT074) listed in the Schedule of Rates in respect of the alternative range of kitchen units, worktops and associated accessories (preliminaries and general conditions clause A30/200).

Manufacturer: ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Range: ………………………………………………………………………………………..…………………………….……. Submit supporting information on above alternative range with Tender.

Percentage Addition Against Schedule of Rates

or

Percentage Deduction Against Schedule of Rates

........................ %

........................ %

Page 173: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

SD044 Term Contract 2015 (EU) FT/2

2. I/We tender the following all-inclusive hourly charges for the valuation of Daywork in

accordance with the Contract. I/We understand that the following rates will not be subject to the above Adjustment Percentage.

Daywork - Schedule of Hourly Charges

General operative

£ ……………… per hour

Craft operative

£ …………..… per hour

Electrical operative

£ ………..…… per hour

Plumbing operative

£ …………..… per hour

3. I/We tender the following percentage additions to the invoice price of non-labour items.

Daywork – Percentage Additions (Contract Particulars item 12.1)

Overheads and profit on materials

………..…… %

Overheads and profit on plant, services and consumable stores

………..…… %

Overheads and profit on Sub-Contractors

………..…… %

4. I/We undertake in the event of your acceptance to execute with you a Form of Contract

embodying all the conditions and terms contained in this offer. I/We acknowledge that any such written acceptance shall only be issued by The

Havebury Housing Partnership upon expiry of the standstill period that The Havebury Housing Partnership are required by Regulation 110 of the Public Contracts Regulations 2015 to observe.

5. I/We understand that any acceptance of our Tender is subject to Contract. 6. I/We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any Tender and you

reserve the right to place orders for similar work with other Contractors or your own labour within the Contract Area.

7. I/We agree that, unless specifically withdrawn in writing, this tender will remain open

for acceptance for a period of 12 weeks from the closing date set for receipt of tenders. 8. I/We have completed and returned the Declaration of Interest Statement. 9. I/We confirm that we have fully considered and understand the implications of the

application of the Transfer of Undertakings (Protection of Employment) Regulations 2006 (referred to as ‘TUPE’). I/We confirm that my/our tender is submitted on the basis that TUPE will apply.

Page 174: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

SD044 Term Contract 2015 (EU) FT/3

Signed: ……………………………………………………………………………………………..…………………….………….……… For and on behalf of: ..………………………………………………………………………………………………..……………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………….… Address: ..…………………………………………………………………………………….……..……………………………….……. …………….…..…………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………...………… Date: ………………………………………………………………………………..…..……………………………………….………… Person to contact regarding tender: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………….… Telephone: ..…………………………………………………… Fax: ………………………………………………..……………... E-mail: ………………………………………………………………………………..…..……………………………………….…………

Page 175: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Data Protection Risk Assessment – Appendix D

v1.1 Jul 14

Your name

You have been sent this as part of a risk assessment on how we will share personal data with you in the future.

Please complete BOTH SIDES OF THIS FORM fully and return it to your contact at Havebury. If you have any queries regarding this form, please send

them to [email protected]

Job title

Company name

Contact number

Registration

Are you registered as a Data Controller with the Information Commissioners Office?

Delete as appropriate

If so, what is your registration number?

Who is your Data Protection Officer?

Information required

What data will you require from us in order to provide goods, works or services under the contract?

Tick as appropriate

Property address

Customer name

Customer contact info

Tenancy history

Disabilities

Dates of birth, age or gender

Ethnic origin or religion

Sexual preference or lifestyle

Other sensitive personal data

Will you use the personal data for purposes other than servicing this contract?

If so, please provide details.

Dealing with personal dataDelete as appropriate

For how long will you keep the personal data that we provide?

How will you keep this personal data safe?

Company number

Name of contract

Asbestos data Details of challenging tenants Vulnerable tenants

Please give position, not name

Yes No

Yes No

Appendix D

Page 176: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Yes No

Delete as appropriate

Have you conducted data protection training?

<< CONTINUED FROM OVERLEAF

Yes No

Delete as appropriateHas a data protection breach been reported to the Information Commissioner against your

company, either by yourselves or a third-party? If so, please provide details.

MMYY

Date Detail of breach Outcome (e.g. undertaking, enforcement, fine)

MMYYMMYYMMYY

Declaration

Next steps

This form should be signed by a Director or other person duly authorised to approve the

information provided.

We will check some of the information provided on this form against public sources as part of our

risk assessment.

Please return this form to:

Data Protection Officer

Havebury Housing Partnership

Havebury House

Western Way

Bury St Edmunds

Suffolk IP33 3SP

Or by email to [email protected]

Signature Signed by (print name)

/ /

Date

If so, please answer:

When did you last have training?

Who was trained?

How often do you run training?

Position

Data Protection Risk Assessment – Appendix D

Appendix D

Page 177: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Appendix E

EMPLOYEE PROFILE FORM

Page 178: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

TENDER

Chief Executive The Havebury Housing Partnership Havebury House Western Way Bury St Edmunds Return by: 15:00 hours on

Suffolk IP33 3SP 18 January 2016 Received - Date:

Time:

CONTRACT FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS & SANITARY APPLIANCES 2016 - 2019

Page 179: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Page 1 of 7

HS 012

HAVEBURY HOUSING PARTNERSHIP

POLICY

COMPENSATION POLICY

Controlling Authority – Director of Operations Policy Number HS 012 Issue Number 5 Status – Approved 04.12.13 Date – November 2013 Review Date – November 2016 Equality & Diversity Impact Assessment carried out – December 2010 Impact - High

Page 180: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Page 2 of 7

THE HAVEBURY HOUSING PARTNERSHIP

COMPENSATION POLICY 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 The Havebury Housing Partnership (hereafter known as Havebury) is

committed to the provision of a high quality efficient and effective service for all tenants and leaseholders. However, it is recognised that there will be occasions where the level of service drops below the approved published standard, and it may be appropriate to offer compensation in recognition of the actual inconvenience, financial loss or distress a tenant or leaseholder has suffered.

1.2 There may also be occasions where it is appropriate to pay compensation to a

person who is not a tenant or leaseholder with Havebury, but who has suffered actual financial loss or inconvenience as a direct result of an action, or failure to take action by Havebury or a contractor working on its behalf.

1.3 Generally compensation requests will be made as part of a formal complaint,

however, this is not a necessary requirement for it to be requested or considered.

2. PURPOSE 2.1 This policy takes into consideration the need for a clear and structured policy

which ensures equality for all tenants in accordance with:

Tenants Guarantee Housing Corporation 1994

Leasehold Reform Housing and Urban Development Act 1993

Planning and Compensation Act 1991

Havebury Policy HS011 - Complaints 2.2 This policy outlines key areas of service delivery where compensation claims

may be appropriate when service levels are not met according to Havebury’s approved and published service standards. It provides guidance as to when the payment of compensation will be considered and when it will not be considered.

2.3 This policy sets out guidance on how compensation will be calculated in order

to ensure consistency when assessing a loss of a service, financial loss, inconvenience and distress.

2.4 The Tenants Guarantee gives a right to tenants to be compensated for the

failure to repair. 3. SCOPE 3.1 The Compensation Policy applies to tenants, leaseholders and other

individuals who have suffered inconvenience, distress or financial loss as a direct result of the action or failure to act by Havebury or one of its Agents.

Page 181: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Page 3 of 7

3.2 It does not apply where the inconvenience, distress or financial loss has been

caused by a resident, another person or third party or other event that is outside of the control of Havebury. This includes the actions of another tenant, leaseholder or other individual eg flooding from another flat, which should be covered by a home contents insurance policy.

3.3 Where a contractor or other third party employed by Havebury is responsible

for the service failure, then they will be expected to pay appropriate compensation in accordance with this policy. Where appropriate Havebury may at its discretion choose to pay compensation and seek to recover it from the contractor or third party later. When renewing contracts with external contractors, Havebury will seek to include either this compensation policy within the contract conditions or require the contractor to operate a similar policy. Tenants and leaseholders will not be expected to approach contractors or third parties working on behalf of Havebury direct in any claim for compensation.

4. FRAMEWORK 4.1 Under this policy the payment of compensation will be considered in the

circumstances given below, although it is accepted that there will be other circumstances where the payment of compensation is appropriate.

Failure to deliver a service subject to a service charge.

Failure to deliver a service in line with published service standards.

Failure to complete repairs within specified time.

Failure to keep appointments.

Failure to complete other works within agreed response times.

Failure to respond to a complaint within specified time scales.

Failure of staff or contractors to take reasonable care which results in damage to possessions or decorations.

Loss of use of part or all of tenants home.

Loss of cooking facilities.

Loss of heating.

Loss of hot water.

Loss of heating or hot water in flats/supported housing schemes with communal systems.

Loss of communal facilities (i.e. laundry, common room, lifts, door entry systems etc) in flats/supported housing schemes.

Failure to undertake cleaning of communal areas of flats/supported housing schemes.

Failure to provide grounds maintenance or gardening service. 4.2 A guide to the level of compensation and when it would normally be paid is

provided in Section 5. 4.3 Compensation will not be payable where the tenant or other person has

contributed to the service failure, i.e. by refusing access, by causing damage to or due to misuse of systems in the property.

Page 182: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Page 4 of 7

4.4 Compensation will not be payable where appropriate action has been taken by Havebury or its agents to mitigate the circumstances, i.e. by providing temporary heating or other facilities, making good any damage, replacing damaged items etc.

4.5 Havebury will only consider compensating tenants for damage to their

belongings if the damage has been caused due to the actions or failure to act of employees or contractors. Tenants are responsible for ensuring all furniture, soft furnishings and personal possessions are covered by their own home contents insurance. Damage caused to such items in any other way is not covered by Havebury’s insurance or this policy.

4.6 Compensation will not normally be paid to tenants or leaseholders who are

affected by noise or disturbance caused by building or repair work being carried out by employees or contractors.

5. PAYMENT OF COMPENSATION 5.1 Where it has been determined under this policy that compensation is payable

the following guidelines should be followed. Where a tenant or leaseholder has arrears of rent or service charges, all or part of the compensation may be set against those arrears at the discretion of the Head of Service or Director.

5.2 Loss of services for which a service charge is paid. 5.2.1 Where there has been a loss of services for which a service charge is paid

then compensation in the form of a refund of the relevant service charge for that service will be paid. One week’s service charge will be refunded for each week or part week the service has been unavailable after the time limits set out below: Loss of heating or hot water with communal systems for more than 7

days. Loss of laundry facilities in supported schemes for more than 7 days. Loss of use of common room for more than 14 days. Loss of door entry system for more than 7 days. No cleaning of communal areas for 10 consecutive days after the first

report No gardening service/grounds maintenance service for 28 consecutive

days after the first report Loss of lift service for more than 7 days.

5.2.2 Where a service charge is eligible for housing benefit, tenants in receipt of housing benefit may have the amount of compensation deducted from their benefit entitlement.

5.2.3 In addition to a refund of the service charge, compensation may also be

payable as set in 5.3 below where temporary heating or hot water is provided for longer than 14 days to meet additional electricity charges.

Page 183: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Page 5 of 7

5.3 Loss of Facilities to Individual Homes 5.3.1 Havebury will refund tenants’ rent where they are unable to use rooms or

facilities in their homes because of a delay in carrying out repairs or other works to the property beyond the completion date given to the tenant and reasonable alternative provision has not been made.

The following payments may be made:

Where there is a loss of room or facility due to a delay in completing a repair that exceeds a period of 48 hours after the completion date given for the repair.

Where there is a loss of room or facility due to a delay in completing works; e.g. fitting a new bathroom that exceeds a period of 48 hours after the completion date given to the tenant for the work.

5.3.2. The amount of compensation payable will be based on the rooms which are

unusable for the actual time in days that they were unavailable for use as shown below:

Kitchen 25% of daily rent

Bathroom with toilet that is the only toilet in property 50% of daily rent

Bathroom without toilet 25% of daily rent

Toilet that is the only toilet in the property 50% of daily rent

Living/dining room etc 10% of daily rent

Bedroom, where there is no alternative bedroom to use 10% of daily rent

Loss of heating in excess of 14 days where temporary heaters have been provided

£3.00 per day

Loss of hot water in excess of 14 days where an immersion heater or other provision has been made (i.e. PET tank)

£1.50 per day

Loss of heating in excess of 48 hours (October to March unless the tenant has verifiable medical reasons for requiring heating outside this period) and no alternative provision has been made

£6.00 per day

Loss of hot water in excess of 48 hours and no alternative provision has been made

£3.00 per day

5.4 Compensation for Loss of Earnings 5.4.1 Compensation of actual earnings lost up to a maximum of £70 per day may

be paid where a tenant or leaseholder has taken time off work to allow access where an appointment has been made and an appointment for the same repair has been not kept on more than two occasions.

5.4.2 Compensation for loss of earnings at the same rate, may be considered for

other circumstances where a tenant or leaseholder has had to take time off

Page 184: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Page 6 of 7

work due to a failure by Havebury or its contractors to deliver a service as previously advised to a tenant.

5.4.3 Payment of compensation for loss of earnings is at the discretion of a Head of Service or Director and proof of earnings will be required.

5.5 Compensation for Damage to Possessions 5.5.1 Havebury will consider compensating tenants if any of their possessions are

damaged because an employee or contractor has not taken enough care when doing a job in their home. Tenants should give details in writing of the loss and the sum they want in compensation, together with any supporting evidence such as photographs, age, value, receipts etc. Damaged property should be retained until the claim is resolved. This will be passed to Havebury’s insurers who will evaluate the claim. Any compensation will be based on age and condition, i.e. we will not replace “new for old”.

5.6 Ex Gratia Payments 5.6.1 Ex Gratia payments may be made as appropriate, for instance where a

service failure has resulted in a tenant or leaseholder out of pocket expenses such as mileage, telephone calls etc. A payment of £5.00 per month can be made until the matter is resolved. This may be increased for more complicated cases at the discretion of Head of Service or Director where a refund of actual verifiable expenses can be approved.

5.6.2 An Ex Gratia payment may be made where it is appropriate as an apology

and to recognise the service provided was below the accepted standard. This would normally be a one off payment of £10.00, in the form of a voucher or some flowers for instance.

5.7 Compensation for Distress and Inconvenience 5.7.1 Compensation may be considered for what might generally be described as

distress. This includes stress, anxiety, frustration, inconvenience, worry or outrage. This would normally apply where the nature of the service failure or other problem was for a prolonged period of time (more than 28 days) or had had a significant impact on the tenant. Payments up to the sum of £250 can be authorised by a manager. In exceptional cases, larger payments may be made at the discretion of a Head of Service or Director.

6. OTHER COMPENSATION PAYMENTS 6.1 As detailed in the tenant’s Guarantee, Havebury will grant its tenants similar

rights to compensation for improvements under regulations made by the Secretary of State, under the Leasehold Reform, Housing and Urban Development Act 1993.

6.2 A tenant that has made approved improvements to their home may be able

to get compensation from Havebury for the improvements when their tenancy ends. Payment will be at the discretion of the Director of Operations.

Page 185: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Page 7 of 7

6.3 Havebury’s Repairs and Maintenance Standards Policy details repairs covered

by the Right to Repair scheme and the time limits for each repair. Compensation payments for failure to meet specified standards will be determined by the Director of Operations taking into account current legislation covering the Right to Repair scheme. Compensation payments will be made at the discretion of the Director of Operations.

7. DISSATISFACTION WITH COMPENSATION 7.1 If a tenant or claimant is dissatisfied at the outcome of their compensation

claim, they will be made aware of the Havebury complaints procedure. Payment of compensation does not prevent a tenant from making a complaint under Havebury’s complaint procedure.

8. MONITORING 8.1 The logging of compensation claims and monitoring their progress will be the

responsibility of departmental managers. Where compensation is related to a complaint, this must be recorded on OneView. Compensation should be identified separately from goodwill gestures. The Head of Assets and/or Head of Housing will monitor compensation claims and provide reports to Executive Directors and appropriate committees or the Board as directed.

9. RESPONSIBILITIES 9.1 Overall responsibility for the payment of compensation lies with the Chief

Executive and the Management Team. The Director of Operations will be nominated “Controlling Authority”.

10. EQUALITY & DIVERSITY 10.1 An Equality and Diversity assessment was completed in December 2010 and

the policy was found to be compliant. A further assessment will be undertaken each time the policy is reviewed.

11. SUMMARY Compensation is paid for:

Description Type

Loss of services where service charge is paid Refund of service charge

Loss of facilities based on rooms which are unusable %age of daily rent

Loss of heating/hot water in excess of 14 days Set amount per day

Loss of earnings Maximum £70 per day

Damage to possessions Insurers to evaluate

Ex gratia payments for expenses or as apology Discretionary voucher

Distress and inconvenience Up to £250

Right to compensation for tenant improvements Refer to legislation

Right to Repair scheme Refer to legislation

Page 186: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Page 1 of 6

HS 004A

HAVEBURY HOUSING PARTNERSHIP

POLICY

CUSTOMER CARE FOR

CONTRACTORS

Controlling Authority – Director of Operations Policy Number HS 004/A Issue No. 1 Status – Approved Date – June 2014 Review Date – June 2017 Equality & Diversity Impact Assessment carried out – TBC Impact - TBC

Page 187: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Page 2 of 6

CUSTOMER CARE

1. Purpose 1.1 The aim of this policy is to ensure that Contractors working on behalf

of Havebury Housing Partnership (hereafter called Havebury) reflect good practice and have a clear customer focus. This Policy is a version of Policy HS004 applicable to contractors undertaking work or providing services on behalf of Havebury.

1.2 Customer Care will be described as:

Treating customers and colleagues with respect and courtesy

Ensuring that the people who pay for the services provided by Havebury through their rents or leasehold service charges, receive an efficient and satisfactory service

Ensuring that other organisations who have an interest in Havebury also receive an efficient and effective service

Involving the customer, listening to and considering their views with regard to the provision of services

Understanding customers and meeting their needs whenever possible

Providing clear and concise information and explanations to customers

Providing clear methods for customers to communicate with the contractor

1.3 All contractors will inform tenants about the services they receive

and the standards of these services.

1.4 Contractors will adhere to Havebruy’s Service standards that have been set and publicised to tenants. They are important to the organisation so that performance can be measured against them.

1.5 Contractors should operate a complaints procedure aligned to

Havebury’s complaints procedure. 1.6 Discrimination in any form will not be tolerated by Havebury.

Page 188: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Page 3 of 6

2. Scope 2.1 This policy extends to all Havebury’s customers. Havebury views its

customers as being “individuals, groups of people, or organisations who pay for, receive services from, and hold expectations of Havebury as a service provider”. Customers are defined as being:

tenants

leaseholders

shared owners

licensees

housing applicants

local authorities with whom Havebury works

organisations and their clients to whom a service is provided

partner agencies

3. Responsibilities 3.1 Day to day responsibility lies with the Chief Executive and the

Management Team. The Director of Operations will be nominated “Controlling Authority”.

3.3 Issue control: The management of duly authorised policies and

procedures and amendments will be the responsibility of the Director of Operations who will ensure they are circulated to appropriate individuals and they are kept updated with the current versions.

4. Method

A contractor delivering services on behalf of Havebury will deliver customer care as outlined in 1.2 by ensuring its employees are trained and committed to providing excellent customer care.

All employees will be trained to deliver excellent customer care.

Training will be delivered to new employees at induction and at regular intervals throughout their employment.

Page 189: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Page 4 of 6

Contractors will recognise that there are tenants and customers who have specific needs relating to communication and service delivery. All employees will receive training to raise their awareness to allow them to deliver services appropriately.

Contractors employees must be uniformed and wear identity badges upon which the company name and employee’s name are clearly visible.

Contractors are expected to inform tenants in writing at least 10 working days in advance of any planned works being undertaken.

Contractors will provide an out-of-hours telephone service, for emergencies as appropriate.

All contractors will be required to adhere to the Customer Care Policy.

5. Appointments

Contractors are expected to make appointments with customers which as far as is practicable are convenient for the tenant. If necessary appointments out of normal working hours will be available.

If, due to unforeseen circumstances such as employee illness, an appointment cannot be kept, the customer will be notified as soon as possible.

If a visit is made to a customer's home, and access cannot be obtained, a card will be left indicating the time the contractor called and how to contact them.

Where customers are on the Lone Working Register, any home visit will be carried out in accordance with Havebury’s Lone Worker Policy.

Compensation of actual earnings lost up to a maximum of £70 per day will be paid where a tenant or leaseholder has taken time off work to allow access and where an appointment has been made the appointment for the same repair has been not kept by the contractor on more than two occasions.

6. Confidentiality All interviews, correspondence and personal information will be

treated in strictest confidence and in accordance with the Data Protection Act.

Page 190: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Page 5 of 6

7. Customer Service Standards 7.1 Havebury has a set of customer service standards which all

contractors delivering works or services on its behalf are expected to adhere to. The current service standards for 2014-15 are as follows:

Answer telephone within 6 rings/10 seconds

Call customers back within 2 working days of their call

Give name of company and name of employee when answering telephone

Acknowledge letters within 2 working days

Acknowledge emails & website enquiries within 1 working day

Respond fully to all queries within 10 working days

Make appointments with customers that are convenient to them

Keep appointments within 10 minutes of agreed time

(Or notify customers in advance if the visit is going to be earlier or later than 10 minutes of agreed time.)

8. Home visits

Contractor’s employees, when undertaking visits to customers homes will:

Show identity card to customer before entering property

Wear an appropriate uniform with contractors name clearly displayed

Treat the customer’s home, household members and possessions with respect being sensitive to any special needs within the household

Not play radios or use the facilities (e.g. toilet) without first seeking the consent of the customer

Park vehicles at or around the property with consideration for the customer and other residents

Page 191: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Page 6 of 6

Behave appropriately at all times whilst at the property, refraining from any actions or language which may be deemed offensive

Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to possessions, furnishings decorations etc. - if it occurs, to make good

Use “overshoes”, dust sheets and protective sheeting to minimise dirt and inconvenience as far as is practical

Clean up and leave property as found

Observe Health & Safety requirements including the use of relevant PPE and advise the customer of any Health & Safety requirements applicable to them

Report back to Havebury on any damage which could not be resolved on site to be considered for other remedies or an insurance claim

Report back to Havebury’s Contract Manager any cause for concern relating to the property (e.g. any defects noted) or household (e.g. vulnerable adult, or unsanitary conditions)

Act in accordance with any Lone Worker notifications provided by Havebury

9. Equality & Diversity

The contractor shall at all times observe the requirements of the Equality Act 2010 and shall provide the services in a manner

consistent with Havebury’s Equality and Diversity Policy. 10. Monitoring

Havebury will test customer care and service standards by a variety of appropriate methods, e.g. mystery shopping, telephone surveys, ad hoc surveys of service users, STAR survey

Contractors will operate a feedback and complaints policy which allows customers and tenants to comment both positively and negatively on services/work provided.

Page 192: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Revised May 2013

Safety Requirements

for Contractors

Issued by The Havebury Housing Partnership

The Havebury Housing Partnership Code of Practice requires of Contractors and Sub Contractors that all relevant legislation appertaining to construction and maintenance etc shall be observed particularly in respect of health and safety matters.

The details of this Code of Practice shall be made known and be available to all employees and sub-contractors of the contractor.

Issue18 - May 2013

Page 193: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Revised May 2013

Index

Introduction

Legal Requirements

PART 1 1 Reporting of injuries and dangerous occurrences

2 Personal Protective Equipment

3 Areas of work

4 Services

5 Machinery guards

6 Cranes, lifting gear and vehicles

7 Entry to Confined Spaces

8 Noise Control

9 Means of access/egress and place of work

10 Scaffolding

11 Excavations

12 Demolition work

13 Electrical Work

14 Good housekeeping

15 Dress Code

PART 2 1 Fire hazards during building operations

2 General site precautions

3 Waste Management and Disposal

4 Highly flammable liquids (Flash point <32°C)

5 Flammable liquids (Flash point between 32°C and 66°C)

6 Flammable adhesives and timber preservatives

7 Compressed gas cylinders

8 Flame producing apparatus

9 Temporary electrical supply

10 Temporary heating arrangements

11 Alterations to existing buildings

12 In case of fire

13 Smoking

14 Asbestos

APPENDIX 1 Use of ladders and access equipment in painting and maintenance contracts

APPENDIX 2 Additional requirements for protection of scaffold from intrusion

Page 194: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Revised May 2013

Code of Practice

Safety Requirements for Contractors (Including Direct Services)

Introduction

Contractors shall comply with the instructions contained in this Code of Practice in addition to any other conditions specifically relating to health and safety, detailed in the formal contract.

The requirements are additional to any others which may be necessary for the safety of operatives, members of the public or other occupiers of buildings in which Contractors may be working.

Throughout this document the expression “Havebury” means the Havebury Housing Partnership and the “Nominated Employee” or “HNE” means the employee appointed by Havebury to be responsible for supervising the Contract. Contractor includes all Sub-Contractors and any other persons working on the site under the control of the Contractor.

The specified requirements shall be varied only by written authority from Havebury’s Nominated Employee.

If the Contractor is in any doubt about any section of this code of practice, then Havebury’s Nominated Employee must be consulted.

Legal Requirements

Whilst this code of practice sets out certain mandatory requirements, it is not a complete statement of all requirements. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all-relevant legislation is observed, particularly in respect of health and safety matters.

Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, such items of legislation include:

The Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974

Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations 1999

Workplace (Health and Safety and Welfare) Regulations 1992

Provision and Use of Work Equipment Regulations 1998

Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment Regulations 1998

Personal Protective Equipment at Work Regulations 1992

Manual Handling Operations Regulations 1992

Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2007

Control of Substances Hazardous to Health 2004

Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

Control of Asbestos Regulations 2012

Work at Height Regulations 2005

Site Waste Management Plans Regulations 2008

1

Page 195: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Revised May 2013

PART 1

1. Reporting of injuries and dangerous occurrences (RIDDOR)

1.1 The contractor’s attention is drawn to the Reporting of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences Regulations 1995. All notifiable injuries, diseases and dangerous occurrences must be reported to the Health and Safety Executive using the appropriate reporting forms. In addition Havebury’s Nominated Employee (HNE) shall also be informed.

1.2 First Aid facilities shall be provided by the Contractor as required under the Health and Safety (First Aid) Regulations 1981.

2. Personal Protective Equipment

2.1 The Contractor shall provide appropriate personal protective equipment/clothing as identified by the Contractor’s risk assessment. The Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring that such clothing or equipment is used and in good condition.

2.2 On construction sites or works of engineering construction, safety helmets and safety boots shall be worn at all times.

3. Areas of work

3.1 Contractors shall confine themselves to the area of their own work except when authorised by the HNE. Where practicable, contract areas shall be fenced off and proper access routes shall be included.

4. Services

4.1 Under no circumstances shall the Contractor couple up equipment to Havebury’s electric supply, compressed air, water or other piped service without first obtaining permission from the HNE.

5. Machinery guards

5.1 Machinery guards and fencing etc shall be properly secured before any plant or equipment is used.

6. Cranes, lifting gear and vehicles

6.1 Contractors who bring cranes, lifting gear or similar appliances shall ensure that the statutory requirements relating to periodical testing and examination have been complied with. Independent examination certificates shall be produced if requested by the HNE.

6.2 Should any equipment belonging to Havebury be required to be used by the Contractor, the Contractor must apply to the HNE for permission to use it.

2

Page 196: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Revised May 2013

7. Entry to Confined Spaces

7.1 No tank, vessel, chamber sewer or other similar enclosed space shall be entered without a competent person first carrying out recognised tests for dangerous fumes, flammable gases and lack of oxygen. A permit to work system shall apply and Contractors will be expected to provide relevant risk assessments and method statements for the activity. These will be incorporated into the permit.

Attention is drawn to the Confined Spaces Regulations 1997.

8. Noise Control

8.1 Contractors shall ensure that all practicable measures are taken to control the noise produced by his operations and that the noise from all compressors and similarly noisy equipment is suitably attenuated. For particularly noisy operations (e.g. use of road breakers) ear protection shall be worn.

Attention is drawn to the Control of Noise at Work Regulations 2005 and to HSE Code of Practice for reducing the exposure of Employed Persons to Noise.

9. Means of access/egress and place of work

9.1 All routes to and from the workplace must be clear of any trip or slip hazards

9.2 All ladders shall be in good condition and when used shall be securely lashed at the top or bottom or footed and afford a good handhold at the top.

9.3 See Appendix 1 for use of ladders and access equipment in contracts

10. Scaffolding

10.1 All scaffolding shall be erected by the Contractor in accordance with the Work at Height Regulations 2005 and supporting guidance, and as Appendix 1.

10.2 See Appendix 2 for protection of scaffold against intrusion.

11. Excavations

11.1 Contractors shall make sufficient enquiries before any excavation work is attempted, to ensure there are no buried cables, piping etc.

11.2 Any excavations or openings into which any person may fall shall be adequately fenced.

12. Demolition and dismantling work

12. 1 All demolition and dismantling work shall be carried out by the contractor in accordance with the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2007.

3

Page 197: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Revised May 2013

13. Electrical Work

13.1 All electrical work and work involving the use of electric tools and equipment shall be carried out in accordance with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 and the IEE Regulations.

13.2 All portable tools shall operate on a supply of 110V or less unless specific approval for 240V operation, together with an earth leakage circuit breaker, has been given by the HNE.

13.3 All electrical contractors shall comply with the requirements of Part P of the Building Regulations.

14. Good housekeeping

14.1 Contractors shall ensure that the site and all areas of work are kept tidy at all times, in order to minimise slip, trip and fall hazards.

15. Dress Code

15.1 The minimum dress code for summertime working shall be full length trousers and sleeved tee-shirts. This does not preclude the wearing of any necessary PPE required for the working task. Shorts are not permitted.

PART 2

1. Fire hazards during building operations

1.1 Buildings in the course of erection or undergoing alteration, repair or maintenance are particularly vulnerable to fire and fire spread for a variety of reasons, such as:

Combustible building materials being stored and used;

Use of flame producing equipment and flammable adhesives;

Fire protection equipment not being in position.

1.2 In occupied buildings staff and visitors in adjacent areas could be put in danger by a fire originating from a Contractors activity.

1.3 Buildings of historical and architectural value may not conform to present day standards for fire resisting structures. Extensive roof voids may exist.

1.4 The Contractor prior to the commencement of work should undertake a fire risk assessment, if there is a significant risk of fire.

1.5 All hot works will be carried out under a “Hot work permit system”.

1.6 Quartz halogen lamps shall not be used inside any building.

2. General site precautions

2.1 Where possible, combustible materials should be stored outside the main buildings, with a suitable firebreak including building materials which are combustible or have easily ignitable packaging.

4

Page 198: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Revised May 2013

2.2 Materials when stored shall be in locked rooms or stores secure against intrusion and marked “No Smoking”.

2.3 Fire extinguishers will be unobstructed and fire escape routes and exits shall remain clear.

2.4 Space below raised huts shall be enclosed to prevent accumulation of rubbish.

2.5 Grass and undergrowth shall be kept short around temporary buildings and stores which are combustible.

3. Waste Management and Refuse Disposal

3.1 All Havebury construction sites are required to have a site waste management and disposal plan irrespective of value of contract. This shall range from simple plans to those required under legislation. The plan shall include all materials to be recycled, reused and taken to landfill.

3.2 Combustible refuse such as wood shavings, packaging materials etc. shall be regularly removed to a safe place, prior to disposal.

3.3 Burning of refuse shall not be permitted on site.

4. Highly flammable liquids (Flash point <32°C)

4.1 The Highly Flammable Liquids and Liquefied petroleum Gases Regulations 1972 and Petroleum Consolidation Act 1928 shall be complied with.

4.2 Highly flammable liquids shall be kept in screw-capped cans, steel barrels or drums capable of being securely closed. Petrol containers shall be marked “Petroleum Spirit - Highly Flammable”. Other containers shall be appropriately marked.

4.3 All containers shall be kept in a locked metal bin (max contents 60 gallons) or in a well ventilated, locked hut or cage having a non-combustible floor, walls and roof.

4.4 Lockers and stores shall be marked to indicate the contents and carry a “No Smoking” sign and shall be in the open air (6m from boundary fences, roads, combustible materials, and electrical equipment capable of igniting vapour).

4.5 Transfer from one vessel to another shall be carried out in the open air (or in a flammable goods store).

4.6 Tanks of petrol engines shall not be filled whilst the engines are running. The transfer of liquid shall be undertaken using funnels and extended hoses.

5. Flammable liquids (Flash point between 32°C and 66°C)

5.1 Paraffin oil and similar liquids shall be stored in metal lockers or be kept in detached, non-combustible buildings, or in the open air away from buildings.

5.2 Flammable paints, in quantities greater than 50 litres, shall be treated as flammable liquids.

5

Page 199: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Revised May 2013

6. Flammable adhesives and timber preservatives

6.1 The storage provisions set out in Paragraph 5.1 shall apply.

6.2 When laying floors or applying timber preservatives etc ventilation shall be adequately maintained and all sources of ignition removed from the area. “No Smoking” notices shall be displayed.

7. Compressed gas cylinders

7.1 All relevant requirements of the Highly Flammable Liquids and Liquefied Petroleum Gases Regulations 1972 shall be complied with.

7.2 All cylinders shall be kept away from sources of heat or potential fire hazards.

7.3 Full and empty cylinders not in use shall be kept segregated and in a safe position - secured upright, undercover in the open air or in a well-ventilated store external to the main building.

7.4 LPG cylinders shall not be of greater capacity than 15 Kg and when used for heating purposes, shall be sited externally. When not in use, the main valve shall be shut off.

8. Flame producing apparatus

8.1 Welding, cutting, brazing equipment; blow lamps and plumber’s furnaces shall be operated only by skilled workman under the following conditions:-

Litter, rubbish and combustible materials shall be removed from the vicinity of the work or protected with non-combustible material e.g. sheet metal.

The apparatus shall not be used on or near other containers of flammable liquids or compressed gases.

The apparatus shall not be left unattended when alight.

An adequate number of fire extinguishers shall be placed readily to hand.

9. Temporary electrical supply

9.1 All electrical installations and services shall be in accordance with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989.

9.2 All cables and connections shall be maintained in good condition and be carefully routed and protected to avoid damage.

10. Temporary heating arrangements

10.1 Stoves etc. shall be sited on a concrete or similar base away from combustible materials and be adequately protected. Flue pipes shall be provided where necessary and comply with appropriate Building Regulations.

10.2 Temporary electrical heating appliances shall be used at bench level on metal stands, well clear of combustibles.

6

Page 200: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Revised May 2013

11. Alterations to existing buildings

11.1 If flame-producing apparatus is to be used in an occupied building, Havebury’s employee in charge of that building shall be notified before commencement of any work.

11.2 A Hot Work Permit is required for all hot works on any site.

12. In case of fire

12 .I Means of fighting fire shall be provided and maintained in good and serviceable condition, and in sufficient numbers.

12.2 All site personnel shall be informed of the arrangements to be followed in the event of fire or the warning to be given and for informing the Fire Service.

12.3 All fires shall be reported to the HNE.

13. Smoking

13.1 Smoking is not permitted on any construction site or any property or land under the control of Havebury.

14. Asbestos

14.1 Asbestos surveys will be issued as appropriate to contractors before any work commences and all appropriate precautions as required under legislation must be in place.

14.2 In the absence of asbestos survey information work should commence or should any suspected asbestos containing material be found then work must stop and the HNE must be told and appropriate instruction will be given.

7

Page 201: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Revised May 2013

Appendix 1

USE OF LADDERS AND ACCESS EQUIPMENT IN CONTRACTS

SAFE USE OF LADDERS

Ladders should be placed at a suitable angle, ideally about 75° to the horizontal, ie about 1000 out of every 4000 in height.

The head of the ladder should rest against a solid surface able to withstand the imposed load. Where the surface may be fragile or brittle so that it cannot withstand such loads or it is necessary to position the ladder away from a surface, equipment such as a ladder stay may be used at the top of the ladder.

Ladders shall only be used for access and for the support of the operative and lightweight tools and materials to complete minor tasks.

All ladders must be securely footed.

ACCESS AND EQUIPMENT

The following criteria relating to height of actual work shall apply to this contract.

1. For minor work generally to ground floor windows, including fascias and gutters.

Use properly footed ladders.

2. For minor work generally to first floor windows, including fascias and gutters. Use properly footed and stabilised ladders.

3. For minor work to barge boards and down pipes up to 5000 above ground. Use properly footed and stabilised ladders.

4. For any work on properties up to 5000 above ground. A manufactures ladder with combined working platform, guard rails and stabilisation may be used for any duration of work

5. For any work on 2 storey properties in excess of 5000. Use tower with internal ladder access.

6. For any work on all properties where work exceeds 7500 in height. Use full scaffold with proper ladder access.

7. A “Cherry Picker” device is acceptable in any situation provided appropriate test certificates are available from the hire company, the operative has approved certificated training and the machine is of the correct capacity.

Contractors should note that non compliance with the above will be seen as a breach of the Havebury Health and Safety requirements and contractors may be prevented from continuing until remedial measures are taken.

8

Page 202: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

Revised May 2013

Appendix 2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PROTECTION OF SCAFFOLD FROM INTRUSION

All scaffolds must be suitably protected at ground level from intrusion by anyone.

On estates where there is communal or public access, 2m high Heras fencing is to be erected, double clipped and on concrete feet and attached to the scaffold or other suitable fixing. On open frontage properties anywhere, this will also apply. Where scaffold is erected in rear/side gardens where there is no public or communal assess then no fencing is required unless there is a risk from children climbing the scaffold in which case fencing must be provided. All scaffolds must display the name of the scaffold company and completion inspection certificates must be made available on demand. Access ladders from ground to first lift must be removed during non-working times and either removed from site or locked away. The above is part of Havebury Health and Safety Procedures. Contractors should note that non compliance with the above will be seen as a breach of the Havebury Health and Safety requirements and contractors may be prevented from continuing until remedial measures are taken.

9

Page 203: SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT … 2 ITT Docs.pdf · FOR INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES ... To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: ... - Mortar:

TO ACCOMPANY TENDER FOR INSTALLATION OF

REPLACEMENT KITCHEN UNITS AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 2016 - 2019

Acknowledgement of Receipt of the Document “Code of Practice – Safety Requirements for Contractors”

adopted by The Havebury Housing Partnership.” I …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… For and on behalf of …………………………………………………………………………………………… am duly authorised in that behalf to acknowledge that I have received, read and noted a copy of the publication “Code of Practice – Safety Requirements for Contractors” adopted by The Havebury Housing Partnership. I further accept that if the tender submitted by the above named Company is considered for acceptance by The Havebury Housing Partnership, then upon request I will submit a copy of the above named Company’s safety policy documentation for consideration as part of the analysis of the priced tender documents. Signed: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… For and on behalf of: ………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Address: ………………………………………………………………………………………….…………………… …………….……………………………………………………………………………………………….……………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Date: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….…………